Yamaha RX A3080/RX A2080 Owner's Manual Owner’s Web AV17 0221 A3080 2080 Om UCRABGLF En D0

User Manual: Yamaha RX-A3080/RX-A2080 Owner’s Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 192

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

AV Receiver

Owner’s Manual

• This unit is a product for enjoying video and music at home.
• This manual explains preparations and operations for everyday users of the unit.
• Read the supplied booklet “Quick Start Guide” before using the unit.

CONTENTS
Introduction

3 Connecting the radio antennas....................................................49
FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models) .................................49

Accessories................................................................................... 5

DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only) .....................................50

About this book ............................................................................ 5

4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna .....51

About remote control .................................................................... 6

Connecting the network cable.....................................................................................................................51
Preparing the wireless antenna ...................................................................................................................51

Batteries ......................................................................................................................................................... 6

5 Connecting other devices............................................................52

Operating range of the remote control......................................................................................................... 6

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function ........................................................................52

FEATURES

6 Connecting the power cable ........................................................52

7 Selecting an on-screen menu language ........................................53

What you can do with the unit ........................................................ 7

8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings..................................54

AV CONTROLLER........................................................................................................................................... 12

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) ..................55

AV SETUP GUIDE........................................................................................................................................... 12

Multi Measure................................................................................................................................................57

MusicCast CONTROLLER.............................................................................................................................. 12

Angle/Height Measure ..................................................................................................................................58

Part names and functions .............................................................13

Measuring at one listening position (single measure) ................................................................................58

Front panel ................................................................................................................................................... 13

Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)........................................................................61

Front display (indicators) ............................................................................................................................ 15

Checking the measurement results .............................................................................................................64

Rear panel..................................................................................................................................................... 16

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments.................................................................................................64

Remote control ............................................................................................................................................ 18

Error messages .............................................................................................................................................65
Warning messages ........................................................................................................................................66

PREPARATIONS

10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly .................................67

Connecting with a wireless router (access point) .......................................................................................67
Connecting the unit to a wireless network..................................................................................................68

General setup procedure ..............................................................19

11 Connecting to the MusicCast network ........................................73

1 Connecting speakers ..................................................................20

MusicCast CONTROLLER ..............................................................................................................................73

Basic speaker configuration ........................................................................................................................ 21

Adding the unit to the MusicCast network ..................................................................................................73

Advanced speaker configuration ................................................................................................................ 30

2 Connecting a TV and playback devices .........................................42

PLAYBACK

Input/output jacks and cables .................................................................................................................... 42

Connecting a TV ........................................................................................................................................... 44
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) ................................................................................. 45

Basic playback procedure .............................................................74

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) ......................................................................................... 47

Selecting an HDMI output jack.....................................................................................................................74

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel ................................................................................................ 48
En

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) ......................................................................................75

Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites) ...........................................................................107

Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay................................ 108

Registering a scene ...................................................................................................................................... 75

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents ..................................................................................................108

Selecting the sound mode.............................................................76

Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) ............ 110

Playing back with surround effects optimized for the scene (SURROUND:AI).......................................... 77

Multi-zone configuration examples ...........................................................................................................110

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD ) ............................................................................. 77

Preparing the multi zone system ...............................................................................................................111

Enjoying unprocessed playback.................................................................................................................. 81

Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 ...........................................................................................................114

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct).......................................................................................... 82

Registering favorite items (shortcut) ........................................... 116

Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound
(Compressed Music Enhancer) .................................................................................................................... 82

Registering an item.....................................................................................................................................116

Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models) ....................................................83

Viewing the current status.......................................................... 117

Recalling a registered item.........................................................................................................................116

Switching information on the front display ..............................................................................................117

Setting the frequency steps......................................................................................................................... 83

Viewing the status information on the TV .................................................................................................118

Selecting a frequency for reception ............................................................................................................ 84

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu)........................................................................... 119

Registering favorite radio stations (presets) .............................................................................................. 84

Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models only) .............................................86

Option menu items.....................................................................................................................................119

Preparing the DAB tuning ............................................................................................................................ 87

CONFIGURATIONS

Selecting a DAB radio station for reception................................................................................................ 87

125

Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets)....................................................................................... 88
Displaying the DAB information .................................................................................................................. 89

Configuring various functions (Setup menu) ................................ 125

Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label ........................................................................... 90

Setup menu items.......................................................................................................................................126

Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models only) .............................................92

Speaker .......................................................................................................................................................131

Selecting a frequency for reception ............................................................................................................ 92

Scene ...........................................................................................................................................................142

Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets)......................................................................................... 93

Video/HDMI .................................................................................................................................................143

Radio Data System tuning ........................................................................................................................... 95

Network.......................................................................................................................................................146

Playing back music via Bluetooth ..................................................96

Bluetooth ....................................................................................................................................................149

Sound ..........................................................................................................................................................136

Multi Zone ...................................................................................................................................................150

Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit ...................................................................................... 96

System.........................................................................................................................................................152

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device.........................97

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)............ 158

Connecting a USB storage device ............................................................................................................... 97

ADVANCED SETUP menu items ..................................................................................................................159

Playback of USB storage device contents .................................................................................................. 98

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) ......................................................................159

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) ................. 101

Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) ................................................................159

Media sharing setup................................................................................................................................... 101

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) ...........................................................................................159

Playback of PC music contents ................................................................................................................. 102

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP).........................................................160

Listening to Internet radio .......................................................... 105

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)...........................................................................................160

Playback of Internet radio ......................................................................................................................... 105

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) .......................................................160

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) ...................................................................................... 161

Multi-zone output ...................................................................... 184

Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS MODE) .................................................................... 161

Information on HDMI.................................................................. 184

Backing up/recovering the settings (BACKUP/RESTORE)........................................................................ 161

HDMI Control...............................................................................................................................................184

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)............................................................................................... 162

Audio Return Channel (ARC) ......................................................................................................................186

Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE).................................................................................................... 162

HDMI signal compatibility ..........................................................................................................................186

Checking the firmware version (VERSION) ............................................................................................... 162

Trademarks............................................................................... 187

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network .............................. 163

Specifications............................................................................ 188

Updating the unit’s firmware .................................................................................................................... 163

APPENDIX

164

Additional Features.................................................................... 164
Playing back audio from the unit on Bluetooth®-enabled speakers/headphones................................. 164
Using wireless surround speakers (MusicCast Surround function)......................................................... 166

Frequently asked questions ........................................................ 167
Troubleshooting ........................................................................ 168
First, check the following:.......................................................................................................................... 168
Power, system and remote control........................................................................................................... 168
Audio........................................................................................................................................................... 170
Video ........................................................................................................................................................... 172
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available for the Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models)................................................................................................................ 173
DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only).............................................. 173
Bluetooth.................................................................................................................................................... 174
USB and network ....................................................................................................................................... 175

Error indications on the front display .......................................... 177
Glossary .................................................................................... 178
Audio information (audio decoding format) ............................................................................................ 178
Audio Information (Others) ....................................................................................................................... 180
HDMI and video information ..................................................................................................................... 180
Network information ................................................................................................................................. 181
Yamaha technologies................................................................................................................................. 181

Supported devices and file formats ............................................. 182
Supported devices ..................................................................................................................................... 182
File formats................................................................................................................................................. 182

Video signal flow........................................................................ 183
Video conversion table .............................................................................................................................. 183
En

Introduction
Accessories

About this book

Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.

# AM antenna

The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the RX-A3080 (U.S.A. model), unless
otherwise specified.

# YPAO microphone

In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.

(except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models)

Some features are not available in certain regions.
Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without
notice.
This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.

# Microphone base
Pole

This manual describes all the “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to
“iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.

# FM antenna
(except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models)

Icons used in this manual

Y
indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.

X
# Power cable

indicates supplementary explanations for better use.

# Remote control
# DAB/FM antenna
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East
and Russia models only)

# Batteries (AAA, LR03, UM-4) (x2)
# Quick Start Guide

* (Except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)
One of the above FM antennas is supplied depending on the region of purchase.
* The microphone base and pole are used for angle/height measurement during YPAO.
* The supplied power cable varies depending on the region of purchase.

About remote control
This section explains how to use the supplied remote control.

Batteries
Insert the batteries the right way round.

Operating range of the remote control
Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the
operating range shown below.

Within
6 m (20 ft)
30°

30°

FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
The unit is equipped with the various useful features.

Playing back TV audio in surround
sound with a single HDMI cable
connection (Audio Return Channel:
ARC) (p.42)

Providing a realistic feel and
surround effect optimized for the
scene of the content
(SURROUND:AI) (p.77)
The AI incorporated in the DSP analyzes the scene of the
content and creates the optimal surround effect for it.

When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI

This AI instantaneously analyzes scenes by focusing on

cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the

sound elements such as “dialogue”, “background music”,

TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals.

“ambient sounds” and “sound effects” as well as optimizes
the surround effect in real time.

HDMI Control
TV audio

This creates a compelling sense of realism with expressive
power beyond conventional sound field effects.

Video from external
device

More advanced ENTERTAINMENT
sound programs (p.78)

transition. These programs allow you to enjoy clearer vocal
and instrumental sounds, distinct narrations, and more

power consumption.

Backlit remote control (p.18)
This unit’s backlit remote control provides excellent
visibility, making it easy to use, even in a dark room.

Additional Features (p.164)
This unit is equipped with a function for connecting speakers
wirelessly. Content being played back by this unit can be

Various wireless connection
methods (p.67)

(p.164).

The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to

also be wireless (p.166).

network cable connection.

individually, the ENTERTAINMENT sound programs are
further improved in acoustic positioning and sound

The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s

sent to a Bluetooth device (speakers, headphones, etc.)

connect to your wireless router (access point) without a
By processing front left and front right sound fields

Low power consumption (p.157)

Home Audio Network with
MusicCast (p.73)

dynamic sound effects.
The unit supports the MusicCast feature that allows you to
link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a
different room and play them back simultaneously, or
control all MusicCast compatible devices with the dedicated
application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.

In addition, if a device that supports the MusicCast Surround
function is used, the surround speakers and subwoofer can

CINEMA DSP
The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment of these desires
for more than 30 years, and this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.

What is a sound field?

CINEMA DSP

We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not only as the sounds that are heard directly

Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of acoustical data by analyzing the actual sound

but also as the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been reflected by the walls or

fields of concert halls and performance spaces around the world. “CINEMA DSP” allows this

ceiling of the building. The character of the reflected and reverberant sound is affected by the

data to be applied to create sound fields. This unit contains a wide variety of sound programs

shape, size, and material of the building, and all of these sounds taken together are what give

using CINEMA DSP.

us the auditory sensation of being in that specific place.

By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the content of the playback source such as

This unique acoustical character of a specific space is what we call the “sound field”.

movies, music, or games, you can maximize the acoustical effectiveness of that specific
content. (For example, a sound program designed for movies can give you the sensation of

Conceptual diagram of a concert hall’s sound field

actually being in that scene.)

CINEMA DSP HD3
“CINEMA DSP HD3” is Yamaha’s flagship 3D sound field playback technology that takes full
advantage of the massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the sound field data.
It delivers more than twice as much capability for generating acoustic reflections as
conventional CINEMA DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability, delivering an
utterly natural and powerful spatial sound field.

Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit

Capability for reproducing reflections

Level

(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)
CINEMA DSP HD3

CINEMA DSP 3D

Time

YPAO
YPAO is Yamaha original automatic calibration system to optimizing your sound and surround environment by using microphone measurement. It can be create ideal listening environment for
maximizing high sound quality contents playback by adjusting various speakers setting and the sound field automatically.

YPAO-R.S.C.

YPAO 3D measurement

In typical home, the sound has problems such as a blurred low-frequency range or a smearing

The direction (angle) of front, surround and presence speakers, and the height of presence

of the acoustical sound image caused by undesirable sound reflection from the walls or ceiling.

speakers as seen from the listening position is measured, and compensation is applied to

“YPAO-R.S.C.” is technology that reduces only the unwanted reflections and produces the

maximize the 3D sound field effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP.

acoustic perfection for your listening environment.
Level

Compensation
Time

YPAO Volume
YPAO Volume automatically adjusts the high and low frequency levels at any volume level so

Level

High

that you hear natural sounds even at low volume.

Low

YPAO Volume ON

YPAO Volume OFF
Frequency

High

Unrivaled audio and video quality
You can enjoy unrivaled high-quality audio and videos with the unit.

High-resolution music enhancer

High-quality video processing

Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 24-bit can be applied to lossless 44.1/48 kHz

From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc) images, any content can be played back as

content such as from a CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further heightening of the

a high-quality image (p.143).

musicality in the original content (p.122).

• Motion adaptive and edge adaptive deinterlacing
• Multi-cadence (including 3-2 pull-down) detection

Before processing
Loudness

• Up to 6 presets that can be applied separately to each input source
Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz
signal (such as a CD)

You can also apply fine touches such as detail enhancement and edge enhancement.

Frequency

After processing
Loudness

Playback bandwidth of a
88.2/96 kHz signal

Frequency

Expandable to meet diverse needs
The unit provides excellent expandability which is applicable to all uses.

Support for bi-amp connections and external power amp
expansion

Multi-zone function
The multi-zone function (p.110) allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2).

To obtain even high audio quality, you can connect front speakers that support power amp

(The following shows examples of use.)

expansion, or expand your system by adding an external power amp (such as a Hi-Fi amp).
For details, refer to “Advanced speaker configuration” (p.30).

Enjoying music using speakers in another room

The best expandability in Yamaha (RX-A3080 only)

While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can listen to music through the

By connecting an external power amp, you can enjoy the highest peak of CINEMA DSP - an

speakers of a different room.

11.2-channel 3-dimensional sound field.
(Example)
External power amp

Study room
(such as Zone2)

Living room (main zone)

Enjoying videos using a TV in another room (HDMI connection)
While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can enjoy videos and music
being input via HDMI on a TV in a different room.

Kitchen
(such as Zone4)

Living room (main zone)

Useful applications
The following applications provide you the flexibility to control the unit or assist you with the cable connections.

AV CONTROLLER

AV SETUP GUIDE

MusicCast CONTROLLER

“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into a

“AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you with

“MusicCast CONTROLLER” is an application that allows you

Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network

cable connections between AV receiver and source devices

to link a MusicCast compatible device to other MusicCast

products. This application provides you the flexibility to

as well as AV receiver setup. This application guides you

compatible devices in other rooms and play them back

control the available inputs, volume, mute, power

through the various settings such as speaker connections,

simultaneously. This app lets you use your smartphone or

commands and playback source.

TV and video/audio device connections and selecting the

other mobile device instead of the remote control to easily

speaker system.

select music to play back as well as configure the unit and

Functions

MusicCast compatible devices.

• Power on/off and volume adjustment

Functions

• Input, scene and sound mode selection

• Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio devices)

Functions

• DSP Parameter adjustment

• Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup assistance

• Selecting and playing back various content

• Playback control (including music selection for some

with illustrations)

– Play back music from your mobile device

• Viewing owner’s manual

– Select an Internet radio station

– Play back music files stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google

For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google

– Play back music files stored on a USB storage device

Play.

sources)

• Operating and configuring the unit
– Select the input source, adjust the volume and mute the
audio output
– Select from a wide variety of sound processing features

X
For details, search for “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on the App Store or
Google Play.

Part names and functions
This section explains the functions of the parts of the unit.

Front panel
a

b c

MAIN ZONE
PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

INPUT
SETUP

OPTION

SCENE

STRAIGHT
1

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

INFO (WPS)

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNING

(CONNECT)

MULTI ZONE

PROGRAM
ENTER

RETURN

ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

HELP

AUX

PHONES
USB

g
a MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the main zone.

Y
Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4 can be turned on/off individually (p.114).

b Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.145)
• HDMI Standby Through is enabled (p.145)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.147)

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

AUDIO

e Remote control sensor

Opening the front panel door

Receives remote control signals (p.6).

f PURE DIRECT key

To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed

Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.82).

g INPUT knob

when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)

Selects an input source.

h Front panel door
For protecting controls and jacks (p.14).

i VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.

• Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.150)

c AI indicator
Lights up when the SURROUND:AI is enabled (p.77)

d Front display
Displays information (p.15).
En

■ Inside of the front panel door
a

cd e

SETUP

OPTION

SCENE

STRAIGHT
1

INFO (WPS)

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNING

(CONNECT)

MULTI ZONE

PROGRAM
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

HELP

AUX

PHONES
USB

a SETUP key
Displays the Setup menu on the TV.

b Menu operations keys
Cursor keys: Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER: Confirms a selected item.
RETURN: Returns to the previous screen.

c OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.119).

d HELP key
In the on-screen menu, the description of a term in the cursor
position appears on the TV. This key is enabled when the “?” icon
is displayed on the on-screen menu.

e AI key
Turns on/off the SURROUND:AI mode (p.77).

f STRAIGHT (CONNECT) key

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

AUDIO

h SCENE keys
Select the assigned input source (including the selected radio
station or content when it is assigned), sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is
in standby mode (p.75).

i MULTI ZONE keys
ZONE 2-4: Enables/disables the audio output to each zone
(p.114).
ZONE CONTROL: Changes the zone that is controlled by the keys
and knobs on the front panel (p.114).

j INFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.117).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button
configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.69).

Registers FM/AM/DAB radio stations as preset stations (p.84, p.88,
p.93).

Enters MusicCast CONTROLLER registration by holding down for 5
seconds (p.73).

Registers USB/network contents or Bluetooth input source as
shortcuts (p.116).

Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.76).

FM and DAB keys (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East
and Russia models only)
Switch between FM and DAB (p.87, p.84).

m PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/DAB radio station (p.88, p.93) (Australia, U.K.,
Europe, Middle East and Russia models) or a preset FM/AM radio
station (p.85) (other models).
Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.116).

n TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.84).

o USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.97).

p YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.55).

k MEMORY key

Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.81).

g PROGRAM keys

(U.S.A. model)

l FM and AM keys (except Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models)
Switch between FM and AM (p.84).

q PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.

r AUX jacks
For connecting devices, such as portable audio players (p.48).

Front display (indicators)
a bc

f g

ECO

VOL. MUTE A-DRC
VIRTUAL YPAO VOL.

ZONE ZONE ZONE PARTY
3
4
IN OUT 1 2 3 2
LINK MASTER STEREO TUNED
Hi-Res ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3

lmn

q r

a HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.

OUT1/OUT2/OUT3
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal.

b ECO
Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.157).

c Firmware update indicator
Lights up when a firmware update is available via the network
(p.163)

d LINK MASTER
Lights up when the unit is the master device of the MusicCast
network.

e ZONE indicators
Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 is enabled (p.114).

f STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM radio station signal
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models) or an
FM/AM radio station signal (other models).

g PARTY
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode (p.115).

FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1
SW2 SR
RPL SBL
SBR RPR

rs
h Information display

r Cursor indicators

Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode
name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.117).

i Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.

j MUTE
Blinks when audio is temporarily muted.

Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.

s VIRTUAL
Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.77), or the virtual surround
processing (p.80) is working.

t Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.

k A-DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.121) is working.

A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)

l Wireless LAN indicator
Light up while the unit is connected to a wireless network (p.67).

D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)

This indicator may light up when the unit is added to the MusicCast

H Surround back speaker (L)

network. For details, see “Adding the unit to the MusicCast network”

J Surround back speaker (R)

(p.73).

B Front presence speaker (L)

m Bluetooth indicator

N Front presence speaker (R)

Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device (p.96).

n Hi-Res

M Rear presence speaker (L)
< Rear presence speaker (R)

Lights up when the high-resolution mode (p.122) is working.

o CINEMA DSP indicator

V Subwoofer (2)

“CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.77) is working.
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up when CINEMA DSP HD3 is activated.

p ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.82) is working.

q SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
En

C Subwoofer (1)

u YPAO VOL.
Lights up when YPAO Volume is enabled (p.120).

Rear panel
a

i j

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT

AV 1

(HDCP2.2)

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

HDMI OUT

AV 7

(HDCP2.2)

NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)

1
ARC

(1 MOVIE)

(5 STB)

(6 GAME)

(ZONE OUT)

AC IN

AV 1

AV 2

(1 MOVIE)

(5 STB)

AV 3

(6 GAME)

AV 4

TRIGGER
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)

VIDEO

(5 STB)

PHONO
L

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

(7 TV)

(3 MUSIC)

AUDIO 3

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

RS-232C

OUT

(FRONT)

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

B AV 2

PRE OUT
R

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

6 OPTICAL

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SPEAKERS
R

AUDIO 4
R

SURROUND

R SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

CENTER

FRONT

EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE

ANTENNA
(2 RADIO)

L
75ȍ

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

(RX-A3080 U.S.A. model)
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper
connections.

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP

a PHONO jacks

p ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks (RX-A3080)

For connecting to a turntable (p.47).

For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or Zone3 and outputting audio (p.111), or for
connecting to an external power amplifier for front presence or rear presence channels (p.40).

b Wireless antenna

ZONE OUT jacks (RX-A2080)

For a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection to a network (p.67) and a Bluetooth connection (p.96).

For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or Zone3 and outputting audio (p.111).

c AUDIO 1-3 jacks

q SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.47).

For connecting to speakers (p.20).

AUDIO 4 (XLR) jacks (RX-A3080 only)

r PRE OUT jacks, PRE OUT (XLR) jacks (RX-A3080 only)

For connecting to an audio playback device and inputting audio signals (p.47).

For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.28) or to an external power amplifier (p.40).

d AV 1-4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.45).

e HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.42). When using ARC, TV
audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

f COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1-2) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support component video and inputting video signals
(p.46).

g HDMI (AV 1-7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.45).

h TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function (p.52).

i REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other
devices from another room (p.113).

j HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.112).

k NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.51).

l RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details.

m VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Taiwan, Brazil and Central and South America models only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.52).

n AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.52).

o ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to radio antennas (p.49).

Remote control
a
b
c
d
e

a Remote control signal transmitter

SLEEP
PARTY

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

o
p

SCENE

TUNER

NET

RED

GREEN

Turns on/off (standby) the zone selected with the MAIN/ZONE
switch.

c MAIN/ZONE switch
Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control (p.114).

d SLEEP key
Pressing this key repeatedly will specify the time (120 min, 90 min,
60 min, 30 min, off), in which the unit switches to the standby mode.

INPUT

p PURE DIRECT key

b z (receiver power) key

MAIN 2 3 4

e PARTY key
f SCENE keys

PRESET
YELLOW

Switch with one touch between multiple settings set using the
SCENE function. Also, turn on the unit when it is in standby mode
(p.75).

BLUE

i
j

g Input selection keys

q
kq
l

Select an input source for playback.

Y
Presses NET repeatedly to select a desired network source.
TOP
MENU

POP-UP
/MENU

HOME

h PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.84).
Recall USB, Bluetooth, or network content that is registered

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

sq
tq

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

as a shortcut (p.116).

i OPTION key

ENHANCER

Displays the option menu (p.119).

j SETUP key
Displays the setup menu (p.125)

TUNING

BAND

Enables/disables the Pure Direct (p.82).

q External device operation keys
Let you perform playback operations when “Bluetooth”, “USB” or
“NET”is selected as the input source, or control playback of the
HDMI Control-compatible playback device.

Y
The playback devices must support HDMI Control. Some HDMI
Control-compatible devices cannot be used.

Turns on/off the party mode (p.115).

BLUETOOTH

USB

o HDMI OUT key
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.74).

Transmits infrared signals.

TUNING

k Menu operation keys
Operates the menu.

l HELP key
In the on-screen menu, the description of a term in the cursor
position appears on the TV. This key is enabled when the “?” icon
is displayed on the on-screen menu.

m Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.76).

n Playback operation keys
Controls playback of the external device.
(RX-A3080)

r AI key
Turns on/off the SURROUND:AI mode (p.77).

s VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.

t MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.

PREPARATIONS
General setup procedure
1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.20)
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.42)
3 Connecting the radio antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.49)
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.51)
5 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.52)
6 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.52)
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.53)
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.54)
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.55)
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.67)
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.73)
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!

1 Connecting speakers
The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.30).
Caution
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.27).

Ideal speaker layout

Functions of each speaker
Speaker type

0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

2
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)

1.8 m
(5.9 ft)

4
10°~30°

Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).

Center 3

Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals).

Surround (L/R)
45

Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce
surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected.

Surround back (L/R)
67

Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.

Front presence (L/R)
ER

Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds or heights channel sounds of Dolby Atmos
and DTS:X contents.

Rear presence (L/R)
TY

Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds or heights channel sounds of Dolby Atmos
and DTS:X contents.

10°~30°
Subwoofer 9

Function

Front (L/R)
12

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of
other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and
place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.

X
• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the left) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the speaker

layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker settings (such
as distances) to suit the speaker layout.

1.8 m
(5.9 ft)

0.3 m (1 ft) or more

• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend
using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence
speakers for further spatial sounds).

1.8 m
(5.9 ft)

• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear presence
speakers.

Basic speaker configuration
If you do not apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external amplifier) or multi-zone configurations, follow the procedure below to place the speakers in your room and connect
them to the unit.

■ Placing speakers in your room

7.2.2/5.2.4 system [S]

Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This

(using both surround back and rear presence speakers)

section describes the representative speaker layout examples.

This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy a

highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.

• To have a full effect of Dolby Atmos contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark. However,
you can also play back Dolby Atmos contents with the 7.1 system (using surround back speakers).

• To have a full effect of DTS:X contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark.
1

• (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead

speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence speaker
9

layout” (p.26).

Y
6

X
• The surround back speakers and rear presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP (p.77).
• When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled
speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)” setting in the
“Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.54).
• (RX-A3080 only)
By using an external power amplifier (p.31), you can make an 11-channel system [★7.2.4] and enjoy Dolby
Atmos and DTS:X contents with the front presence and rear presence speakers.

5.2.4 system [S] (using rear presence speakers)

7.2.2 system [S] (using surround back speakers)

This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a highly-natural

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional

3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the

sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back

surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for

speakers.

enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
E

R
1

1
9

5
6

• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing

When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled

YPAO (p.54).

speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)” setting in the “Setup”
menu before performing YPAO (p.54).

• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers
to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.

5.1.2 system [S] (using front presence speakers)

7.1 system (using surround back speakers)

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional

This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy

speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not

extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.

only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.

X
• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing
YPAO (p.54).
• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers
to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.

5.1 system

5.1 system (front 5.1-channel) (using surround speakers)
We recommend using this speaker system when you cannot place speakers in the rear side of
the room.

X
You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (4.1 system).

X
When placing surround speakers in the front side, set “Layout (Surround)” in the “Setup” menu to “Front” before
performing YPAO (p.54).

5.1 system (front 5.1-channel) (using front presence speakers)

2.1 system

We recommend using this speaker system when you cannot place speakers in the rear side of
the room.

R
1

X
Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1 system.

X
When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO
(p.54).

Presence speaker layout

Dolby Enabled SP
Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.

The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height/Rear Height,
Overhead and Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your listening

It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from speakers

environment (p.133).

that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.

X
• You can enjoy Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or Cinema DSP HD3 with any layout pattern.
• You can configure the placement patterns for front presence and rear presence speakers separately (p.133).

Front Height/Rear Height
Install the presence speakers on the front/rear side wall.
It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom sound
spaces, and sound extensity effectively.

X
Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled speaker unit
may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the Dolby Enabled
speakers.

Notes on installation of ceiling speakers
When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, use the following illustration as a reference.
When using two presence speakers
Overhead
Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position.
It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of front and
rear sound spaces effectively.

Installation position
Just above the listening position, or the ceiling between extensions of front speakers and

listening position

For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers” (p.26).

■ Setting the speaker impedance

When using four presence speakers

Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a 6-ohm
speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use
4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

1
2

Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z

STRAIGHT

Installation position
Front presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the front speakers and listening position

Rear presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the listening position and surround (or surround back)

Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.

SPEAKER¡IMP.
¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡8¬MIN

speakers
Caution

4
5

Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified
contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.

Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power
cable from the AC wall outlet.

You are now ready to connect the speakers.

■ Connecting speakers

Speakers to be connected

Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.

Speaker system
(the number of channels)

Speaker type

Precaution for connecting of the speaker cables
Prepare speaker cables in a place away from the unit, to avoid accidentally dropping wire
strands into the unit’s interior which could result in a short circuit or malfunction of the unit.
Improper connecting of the speaker cables may cause short circuit and also damage the unit
or the speakers.
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before
connecting the speakers.
• Twist the bare wires of the speaker cables firmly together.

7.2.2/5.2.4

7.1/5.1.2

5.1

2.1

Front (L/R) 1 2

(

Center 3

(

Surround (L/R) 4 5

(

)*5

Surround back (L/R) 6 7

)*1

)*3

Front presence (L/R) E R

(

)*4

)*6

Rear presence (L/R) T Y

)*2
(

(

Subwoofer 9

(

If you have eleven speakers, you can connect the both surround back speakers and rear
presence speakers. In this case, the unit automatically changes the speakers to be used,
depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP.
If you have nine speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or rear presence
speakers (*2).

• Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable touch one another.

If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*3) or front presence
speakers (*4).
If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*5) or front presence speakers
(*6).

X
• When using surround back speakers, be sure to connect the surround back left and right speakers. Using only

• Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable come into contact with the unit’s metal parts

one surround back speaker was discontinued.

(rear panel and screws).

• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. When using 2 subwoofers,
configure the “Layout (Subwoofer)” setting (p.134) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an
AC wall outlet.
• When apply this speaker configuration, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.131) to “Basic” (default).
• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an
external power amplifier” (p.40).

Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)
If “Check SP Wires” appear on the front display when the unit is turned on, turn off the unit, and

Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)

then check the speaker cables short circuit.

+
–

Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)

Connecting speaker cables

Connection diagram
Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

(FRONT)

The unit
(rear)
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and
the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent

PRE OUT
R

confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.

FRONT

SURROUND

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

SUR. BACK

CENTER

FRONT

SPEAKERS
R

SURROUND

R SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

CENTER

FRONT

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP

Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and
twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.

2
3

Loosen the speaker terminal.

Tighten the terminal.

R
1

Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the
terminal.

+ (red)

FR
ON

4
9

– (black)

Using a banana plug
4

(U.S.A., Canada, China, Brazil and General models only)

Y
6

Tighten the speaker terminal.

Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.

FR
ON

Banana plug

2
Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
Audio pin cable
(FR
ONT)
1

PRE

OUT

2
SURR
UND

SUR.

BACK

(RE
SUBW AR)
OOFE
R

SURR
OUN

CENT

D BA
CK
L

Advanced speaker configuration
In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.21), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.

Using the four internal
amplifiers for front speakers to
have more high-quality sounds

Bi-amp connection

Combining with an external
power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier,
multichannel amplifier, etc.) to
build an extended system

Using the excess internal
amplifiers for stereo speakers
in another room

Power-amp channel expansion

(Example)

Multi-zone configuration

(Example)

(Example)
External power
amplifier

Bi-amp
connection

Zone2/3

Main zone

■ Available speaker configurations

(RX-A2080)
Main zone

(RX-A3080)
Output
channel
(max)

Main zone
Output
channel
(max)

Bi-amp

External
speakers

External power
amplifier
(required)

Surround back

+1 room

7.2.2 +1Zone

+2 rooms

7.2 +2Zone

Rear presence

7.2.4 [ext.RP]

Front

7.2.4 [ext.Front]

Surround back
Surround back

Front presence

Page

7.2 +1Zone

Front presence

Power Amp Assign
(p.131)

+1 room

Surround back

Multi-zone

Front presence

Surround back
Surround back

Front presence

Surround back

)

Surround back

)

Front presence

)

Surround back

)

Surround back

)

Front presence

Front presence
Rear presence
Front
Front

+1 room
+2 rooms

+1 room
Front presence
Rear presence
Rear presence

7.2.4 [ext.FP+RP]

7.2.2 [ext.Front]
+1Zone

Multi-zone

Power Amp Assign
(p.131)

Page

+1 room

7.2 +1Zone

+1 room

7.2.2 +1Zone

+2 rooms

7.2 +2Zone

Front

+1 room

7.2.2 [ext.Front]
+1Zone

Front

+2 rooms

7.2 [ext.Front]
+2Zone

External power
amplifier
(required)

Surround back

Front presence

Surround back
Surround back

Front presence

Rear presence

External
speakers

Surround back

Surround back
11

Bi-amp

Surround back

)

Surround back

7.2 Bi-Amp

)

Front presence

5.2.2 Bi-Amp

)

Surround back

7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone

+1 room

Y
• When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the
“Setup” menu (p.54).
• When applying a multi-zone configuration, you can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA

7.2 [ext.Front]
+2Zone

7.2 Bi-Amp

5.2.2 Bi-Amp

7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone

7.2.4 Bi-Amp
[ext.FP+RP]

5.2.4 Bi-Amp
[ext.RP]

SP 1-2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu. The following explanation is based on the
assumption that you have not changed the default zone assignments.

7.2 +1Zone

7.2.2 +1Zone
E

1
9

2
9

5
6

7
Zone2

Zone2

Main zone

Speaker

5
6

Main zone

Connect to

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

(not used)

EXTRA SP 1

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1-2

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP 1

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

X
When Zone2 output is enabled (p.114), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

7.2 +2Zone

7.2.4 [ext.RP] (RX-A3080 only)

R
1

9
5

Zone2

4
6

7
1

via
external amp

Y
6

Main zone

via
external amp

Zone3

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1-2

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP 1

Zone3 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP 1

R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

SUBWOOFER 1-2

When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external

When Zone3 output is enabled (p.114), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

amplifier for Zone3 (p.111).

7.2.4 [ext.Front] (RX-A3080 only)

7.2.4 [ext.FP+RP] (RX-A3080 only)

via external amp

R
via external amp

via external amp

2
3

Speaker

Y
6

via
external amp

Connect to

Speaker

via
external amp

Connect to

FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP 1

F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

EXTRA SP 2

R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

SUBWOOFER 1-2

When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external

When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting external

amplifier for Zone3 (p.111).

amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.111).

7.2.2 [ext.Front] +1Zone

7.2 [ext.Front] +2Zone

via external amp

E
1
9

2
9

5
6

Zone2

7
1

Zone2

Main zone

Main zone
Zone3

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP 1

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1-2

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP 1

Zone3 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

7.2 Bi-Amp

5.2.2 Bi-Amp
Bi-amp

Bi-amp

E
1

2
3

Speaker

2
3

Connect to

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

(not used)

EXTRA SP 2

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1-2

7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone

7.2.4 Bi-Amp [ext.FP+RP] (RX-A3080 only)
Bi-amp

Bi-amp

R
via external amp

via external amp

1
9

5
6

7
Zone2

via
external amp

Main zone

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

(not used)

SUBWOOFER 1-2

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP 2

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

SUBWOOFER 1-2

When Zone2 output is enabled (p.114), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting external
amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.111).

5.2.4 Bi-Amp [ext.RP] (RX-A3080 only)
Bi-amp

R
1

2
3

via
external amp

Speaker

Connect to

FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

CENTER

SURROUND

(not used)

EXTRA SP 2

R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

SUBWOOFER 1-2

Y
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external
amplifier for Zone3 (p.111).

■ Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp
connections

■ Connecting Zone2/3 speakers

When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT

To utilize the EXTRA SP 1-2 terminals for Zone2/3 speakers, configure the “Power Amp Assign”

terminals and EXTRA SP1 terminals.

setting in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.54).

When using Zone2/3 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP 1-2 terminals.

To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu

The unit (rear)

after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.54).

SPEAKERS
R

SURROUND

R SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

CENTER

FRONT

EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE

The unit (rear)
SPEAKERS
R SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

CENTER

FRONT

EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP

3
9

Zone2 or Zone3

9
1

Main zone

Zone2 or Zone3

• You can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1-2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.131)

The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP1 terminals output the same signals.

in the “Setup” menu.
• You can also connect Zone2 and Zone3 speakers using an external amplifier (p.111).

Caution
Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp
connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables.

g FRONT (XLR) jacks (RX-A3080 only)

■ Connecting an external power amplifier

Output front channel sounds through XLR balanced cables.

When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the input
jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel signals are

(Example)

output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier
PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks

Caution
• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.

HDMI (HDCP2.2)
2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

HDMI OUT

AV 7

(HDCP2.2)

NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)

3
B)

– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.

(6 GAME)

TRIGGER
OUT

ONENT VIDEO

A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)

– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

B AV 2
(5 STB)

– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume
of the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the
unit) to the pre-main amplifier.

Main input jack

(ZONE OUT)

RS-232C

PR
UT

(FRONT)

PRE OUT
R

3/
NCE

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SPEAKERS
L

R SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

FRONT

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

(HDCP2.2)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

(1 MOVIE)

(5 STB)

(6 GAME)

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

HDMI OUT

AV 7

(HDCP2.2)

NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

1
ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AC IN

AV 2

AV 3

(5 STB)

(6 GAME)

AV 4
Y

A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)

(5 STB)

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

B AV 2

The unit (rear)

TRIGGER
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

RS-232C

OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

(FRONT)

PRE OUT
R

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SPEAKERS
R

SURROUND

R SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

CENTER

FRONT

EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE

ANTENNA
(2 RADIO)

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

a b c de

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP

The unit (rear)

a ZONE2/F.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3080 only)
Output front presence channel audio signals or Zone2 audio signals depending on the “Power Amp
Assign” setting (p.131).

b ZONE3/R.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3080 only)
Output rear presence channel audio signals or Zone3 audio signals depending on the “Power Amp
Assign” setting (p.131).

c FRONT jacks
Output front channel sounds.

d SURROUND jacks
Output surround channel sounds.

e SUR. BACK jacks
Output surround back channel sounds.

f CENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.

ROUND

HDMI OUT

MAIN IN

OUT

CENTER

SUR

R
FRONT

Amplifier with
volume control
bypass
(such as A-S3000)

Making balanced connections
Use XLR balanced cables to connect a power amplifier to the FRONT (XLR) jacks on the unit.
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
AV 2

AV 3

(5 STB)

(6 GAME)

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

HDMI OUT

AV 7

(HDCP2.2)

NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)

3
(ZONE OUT)

AC IN

TRIGGER
OUT

OMPONENT VIDEO

A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)

B AV 2
(5 STB)

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

RS-232C

OUT

RE OUT

(FRONT)

PRE OUT
R

ZONE 3/
PRESENCE

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SPEAKERS

Power amplifier

PRE OUT
(XLR) jacks

Speaker
connections
XLR

(Female connector)

XLR

(Male connector)
Main input (XLR)

About external power amplifiers
We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.
• Hi-Fi amplifier equipped with XLR jacks (to enjoy a 2-channel stereo system with a balanced
connection)
• Multichannel amplifier equipped with unbalanced inputs (to enjoy multichannel CINEMA
DSP)
• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)
• Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 Ω)

2 Connecting a TV and playback devices
Connect a TV and playback devices (video and audio devices) to the unit.
For information on how to connect a USB storage device, see “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.97).

Input/output jacks and cables
The unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Prepare the cables that match the jacks on your devices.

■ Video/audio jacks

■ Video jacks

■ Audio jacks

To input/output video and audio signals, use the following

To input only video signals, use the following jacks.

To input/output only audio signals, use the following jacks.

jacks.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
HDMI jacks

OPTICAL jacks

Transmit video signals separated into three components:

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable.

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single

luminance (Y), chrominance blue (Pb), and chrominance red

Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable.

jack. Use an HDMI cable.

(Pr). Use a component video cable with three plugs.
Digital optical cable
Component video cable

HDMI cable

AV 1
(1 MOVIE)

NENT

COMPO

VIDEO

A AV 1 )
IE
(1 MOV

COAXIAL jacks

Y
Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using as
short a cable as possible to prevent signal quality degradation.

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable.

VIDEO jacks
Digital coaxial cable

Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.

• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel
(ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission features.

AV 1
(1 MOVIE)

Video pin cable

• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.
VIDEO

AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable
(RCA cable).
AUDIO3

Stereo pin cable

XLR jacks
Transmit analog audio signals. Use an XLR balanced cable.
XLR input jacks
Match the pins and insert the “male” connector of the XLR
balanced cable until you hear a click.
XLR balanced cable (male)
IO
AUD

X
When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the PUSH button
on the unit and then pull the connector out.

XLR output jacks
Match the pins and insert the “female” connector of the XLR
balanced cable until you hear a click.
XLR balanced cable (female)
T
OU

E
PR TER
N
CE

Y
When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the lever of the
connector and then pull it out.

About the XLR jacks
• The pin assignments for the XLR jacks of the unit are shown
below. Before connecting an XLR balanced cable, refer to the
instruction manual of your device and verify that its XLR jacks
are compatible with the pin assignments.
XLR input jacks

2. HOT

1. GND
3. COLD

XLR output jacks

1. GND

2. HOT
3. COLD

Connecting a TV

• You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:

Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.

– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box

You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.

• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power
and volume with the TV’s remote control.

■ HDMI connection

To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin

on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.184).

cable).
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.

You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.45).

• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

HDMI OUT jack
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

The unit
(rear)

1
ARC

HDMI

HDMI OUT

AV 1

(HDCP2.2)

1
ARC

AV 1

AV 2

(1 MOVIE)

AV 2

(5 STB)

(1 MOVIE)

AV 3

(5 STB)

AV 4

(6 GAME)

HDMI input

(6 G

COMPONENT VIDEO

(

VIDEO

PHONO
L

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

(7 TV)

(3 MUSIC)

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

HDMI

AUDIO 3

HDMI

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

AUDIO

AUDIO 1
GND

(2 TV)

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

6 OPTICAL

AUDIO 4
R

SURROUND

FRONT

ANTENNA
(2 RADIO)

L
75ȍ

1 OPTICAL

OPTICAL
O

AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)

■ Connecting another TV or a projector
If a second TV or projector is connected to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, you can use the remote control

Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the

to switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching video (p.74). In addition, a TV, etc.,

unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of

placed in Zone 2 can be connected to the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack on the unit (p.112).

the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has
HDMI OUT 2 jack

HDMI OUT 3 jack

an HDMI output jack.

HDMI OUT

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

ARC

The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting

HDMI

(p.153) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A, B), COAXIAL (3, 4, 5)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT

AV 1

(HDCP2.2)

AV 3

AV 2

(5 STB)

AV 3

(6 GAME)

(1 MOVIE)

AV 4

(5 STB)

A AV 1

B AV 2
(5 STB)

AUDIO 2

AV 6

HDMI OUT

AV 7

(HDCP2.2)

(6 GAME)

COMPONENT VIDEO

(1 MOVIE)

AUDIO 1

AV 5

AUDIO 3

and OPTICAL (1, 2, 6) jacks to another input source.

(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)

VIDEO

PHONO

AV 4

1
ARC

AV 1

(1 MOVIE)

AV 2

NETWORK

The unit (rear)

(ZONE OUT)

TRIGGER
OUT
1

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

RS-232C

OUT

If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be

determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.123) in the “Option” menu.

TV (already connected)

HDMI input

HDMI

■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI (AV 1-7) jacks
HDMI (HDCP2.2)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

(1 MOVIE)

(5 STB)

(6 GAME)

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

HDMI OUT

AV 7

(HDCP2.2)

1
ARC

AV 3

6 GAME)

AV 4

(ZONE OUT)

TRIGGER
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

A AV 1

(1 MOVIE)

Projector

(5 STB)

Zone 2/4

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

B AV 2

HDMI output

OUT

HDMI

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

(FRONT)

PRE OUT
R

HDMI

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

CENTER

HDMI

FRONT

SPEAKERS
R

• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 and 3 jack.

SURROUND

R SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

CENTER

NA
O)

• You can connect a video monitor in Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 3 jack in order to enjoy video and audio.

The zone to be used can be selected with “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu.
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

Video device

■ Component video connection

■ Composite video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital

Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial,

coaxial or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio

digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the

output jacks available on your video device.

audio output jacks available on your video device.

Output jacks on video device

Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit

Video

Input jacks on the unit

Audio

Video

Digital coaxial

AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)

Audio
Digital coaxial

AV 1-2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Component video
Composite video

AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
The unit (rear)

AV 3

(1 MOVIE)

(5 STB)

(6 GAME)

AV 1

AV 2

(5 STB)

AV 3

(6 GAME)

AV 4

AV 1

(1 MOVIE)

Video output
(component video)

B AV 2

PHONO

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

(7 TV)

(3 MUSIC)

AUDIO 3

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

(FRONT)

PRE OUT

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

6 OPTICAL

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

SURROUND

R SURROUND BACK

(6 GAME)

AV 4

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

(7 TV)

(3 MUSIC)

Video output
(composite video)

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

AUDIO 3

ZONE OU

VIDEO

GND

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

ZONE 2/
F.PRESENCE

6 OPTICAL

E
R

AUDIO 4
R

Y
AUDIO 4
R

(5 STB)

AV 3

CENTER

S
R

PHONO
L

PR
GND

AV 2

VIDEO

A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)

(5 STB)

(1 MOVIE)

AV 6

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO

1
ARC

AV 5

1
ARC

(1 MOVIE)

AV 4

AV 1-4 (VIDEO)
jacks

AV 1

(HDCP2.2)

AV 2

AV 1-4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT

AV 1

(HDCP2.2)

AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT

Digital optical

ANTENNA
(2 RADIO)

L
75ȍ

ANTENNA
(2 RADIO)

L
75ȍ

C
C

COAXIAL

ZONE 2/Z

COAXIAL

Video device

L
L

AV 1-2 (COAXIAL) or
AV 1-2 (AUDIO) jacks

OPTICAL

R
R

Video device

Audio output
(digital coaxial or analog stereo)

Any of AV 1-2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1-4 (AUDIO) jacks

X
To connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and a digital optical cable, use “Input
Assignment” (p.153) in the “Setup” menu to assign the COMPONENT VIDEO and OPTICAL jacks to the same input
source.

Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)

Audio output
(PHONO)

PHONO jacks

PHONO

Connect audio devices such as CD players and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio

output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections.

L
R

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”

Ground lead

GND

setting (p.153) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (3, 4, 5) and OPTICAL (1, 2,

The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

6) jacks to another input source.
AV 1

AV 2

(1 MOVIE)

AV 1

AV 2

(1 MOVIE)

(5 STB)

GND

1
ARC

(5 STB)

AV 3

(6 GAME)

AV 4

(6 G

COMPONENT VIDEO

(

• (RX-A3080 only)

VIDEO

Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your audio device and verify that its

PHONO
L

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

(7 TV)

(3 MUSIC)

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

Turntable

AUDIO 3

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.43).

COAXIAL
R

O
GND

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be

AUDIO 4
R

OPTICAL

ANTENNA
(2 RADIO)

L
75ȍ

determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.123) in the “Option” menu.

SURROUND

FRONT

Audio output jacks on audio device
Digital coaxial

Audio device

Audio input jacks on the unit
AV 1-2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)
XLR

Digital optical

AUDIO 1-2 (OPTICAL)
XLR

AV 1–4 (AUDIO [RCA])

XLR

Analog stereo (RCA)

AV 3 (OPTICAL)

AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO [RCA])

Analog stereo (XLR)

AUDIO 4 (AUDIO [XLR]) (RX-A3080 only)

Turntable (PHONO)

PHONO

XLR

Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 (COAXIAL,
OPTICAL, AUDIO [RCA], AUDIO [XLR])
jacks

Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)

If you select the AV 1-4, AUDIO 1-4 or PHONO with the input key on the remote control, the
sound played on the audio device will be output from this unit.
* AUDIO 4 (AUDIO [XLR]) jack: RX-A3080 only

When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
The AUX jacks are convenient for temporarily connecting an audio playback device.
Use stereo pin cables to connect an audio device (such as a CD player) to the unit.
For details on connecting a USB device to the USB jack, see “Connecting a USB storage device”
(p.97).

X
Before making connections, stop playback on the device, and turn down the volume of the unit sufficiently.
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

HELP

AUX

PHONES
USB

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

AUDIO

The unit (front)

Audio device

If you select “AUX” as the input source by pressing INPUT, the audio played back on the device
will be output from the unit.

3 Connecting the radio antennas
Connect the supplied radio antenna to the unit.

Assembling the AM antenna

FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
FM antenna
AM antenna

Connecting the AM antenna
HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT

AV 1

(HDCP2.2)

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AV 2

(5 STB)

AV 3

(6 GAME)

(1 MOVIE)

(5 STB)

AV 4

Hold down

(6 GAME)

A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)

AUDIO 2

(7 TV)

(3 MUSIC)

AUDIO 3

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

(FRONT)

PRE OUT
R

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SPEAKERS
R

AUDIO 4
R

SURROUND

R SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.

ANTENNA
(2 RADIO)

L
75ȍ

Release

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

B AV 2
(5 STB)

AUDIO 1

Insert

TRIGGER
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO

PHONO

AV 7

1
ARC

AV 1

(1 MOVIE)

AV 2

• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

The unit (rear)

DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East
and Russia models only)
Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall.
DAB/FM antenna

The unit (rear)
AV 1

AV 2

(1 MOVIE)

(5 STB)

AV 3

(6 GAME)

AV 4

TRIGGER
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)

VIDEO

(5 STB)

PHONO
L

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

(7 TV)

(3 MUSIC)

AUDIO 3

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

PR
(FRONT)

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

B AV 2

PRE OUT
R

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SPEAKERS
R

AUDIO 4
R

SURROUND

R SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

ANTENNA
DAB/FM
(4 RADIO)
(2 RADIO)

L
75ȍ
75ȍ

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

Y
• The antenna should be stretched out horizontally.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM
antenna.

4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless

antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.

• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may
block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security

You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network

software or firewall settings appropriately.

Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.

• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.

Connecting the network cable

Preparing the wireless antenna

Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or
higher straight cable).

If you want to establish a wireless network connection and Bluetooth connection, stand the
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)

Internet

wireless antenna up straight.
For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see “Connecting to
a network device wirelessly” (p.67).

WAN

LAN

Modem

PC
Network cable
The unit (rear)

Router
AV 6

HDMI OUT

AV 7

(HDCP2.2)

NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)

3
(ZONE OUT)

AC IN

Mobile device

TRIGGER
OUT
1

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

RS-232C

OUT

Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.

X
• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set “Network
Connection” (p.147) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as
the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure
the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters
manually (p.147).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Information” (p.136) in the “Network” menu.

5 Connecting other devices

6 Connecting the power cable

Connect a device compatible with the trigger function.

Before connecting the power cable (Taiwan, Brazil and Central and South America
models only)

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger
function

Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are

The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such

Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet.

as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a

Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard.

AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.

system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by

The unit (rear)

connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks with a monaural mini-plug

HDMI OUT

AV 7

(HDCP2.2)

NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)

3
(ZONE OUT)

cable.

AC IN

GGER
OUT
REMOTE
.1A
TAL

TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks

The unit (rear)

Trigger In
(+12V)

Power amplifier
(such as MX-A5000)

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

HDMI OUT

AV 7

3
(ZONE OUT)

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

220V240V
L

110V120V
FRONT

(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)

(HDCP2.2)

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

OUT

TRIGGER
OUT
NETWORK

DMI (HDCP2.2)

RS-232C

ERS

SP2
NCE

CENTER

FRONT

EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

TRIGGER
OUT
1

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

RS-232C

OUT

2
.PRESENCE
(FRONT)

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP

PRE OUT
R

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

CENTER

FRONT

After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit and then
to an AC wall outlet.

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

System
connector
jack

The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

Yamaha
subwoofer

NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)

3
ZONE OUT)

AC IN

OTE

RS-232C

To an AC wall outlet

OUT

You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.156) in the “Setup”

menu.
CENTER

FRONT

EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP

7 Selecting an on-screen menu language
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English, Japanese,

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese.

HDMI OUT

1
2

SCENE

NET

GREEN

BLUE

Cursor keys
ENTER

HOME

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video

If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network

YELLOW

setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

SETUP

TOP
MENU

ENTER.
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

BLUETOOTH

USB

PRESET
RED

Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press

from the unit.

INPUT
TUNER

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

3
4

Press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys to select the desired language.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys to select “System” and press ENTER.

RETURN

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

TUNING

X
The information on the front display is provided in English only.

8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings
If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings

HDMI OUT

manually before performing YPAO.
SCENE

NET

RED

GREEN

“Power Amp Assign” (p.131), then select your speaker system.
(Virtual CINEMA FRONT), select “Configuration” ! “Surround” !

CINEMA FRONT) (p.24)

• When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X

BLUETOOTH

USB

YELLOW

BLUE

SETUP

1
2

Cursor keys
ENTER

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

“Layout” (p.133), then select your front presence speaker layout.
If you are using the rear presence speakers, also select its layout

from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

in “Rear Presence”.

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

TUNING

RETURN

setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

3
4
5

playback, select “Configuration” ! “Front Presence” !

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video

If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
HOME

“Layout” (p.133), then select “Front”.

• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback (p.26)

PRESET

TOP
MENU

• When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system

• Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual

INPUT
TUNER

• When using any of advanced speaker configurations, select

• Advanced speaker configuration (p.30)

Configure the corresponding speaker settings.

Press SETUP.
Use the cursor keys to select “Speaker” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Configuration” and press
ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

SCENE

NET

GREEN

connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.

X
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your

ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the
tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.

technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed

BLUETOOTH

YPAO MIC
jack

for acoustic perfection.

PRESET
RED

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and

settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your

The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)

USB

listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker
room.

INPUT
TUNER

detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your

HDMI OUT

YELLOW

The unit (front)

BLUE

YPAO MIC

Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.
– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.

– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.

– Keep the room as quiet as possible.

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

RETURN

– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not become
an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.

1
2

BAND

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
4

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video

YPAO
5
microphone

from the unit.

MEMORY

TUNING

– Do not connect headphones.

TUNING

Ear height

If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

The following screen appears on the TV.

Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the
crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum.
VOLUME

MIN

MAX

CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT

MIN

MAX

X
To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the
measurement.
En

Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Measure” (p.57) or

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

If desired, select the measuring options.
“Angle/Height Measure” (p.58) and press ENTER.

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
SCENE

measurement.

When “Measuring option” is set to “Multi Measure”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions” (p.61)

INPUT
TUNER

NET

BLUETOOTH

USB

When “Measuring option” is not set to “Multi Measure”:
PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.58)

BLUE

Cursor keys
ENTER

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

TUNING

Multi Measure

Single measure

Multi measure
(5 listening positions)

Selects multi measure or single measure.

e
bac

Measuring method

Checked

Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you want others
to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up to 8 different
positions in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area
defined by those positions (multi measure).

Unchecked (default)

Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the
measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit
that position (single measure).

X
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a
wider space.
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be seated
most frequently.

Multi measure
(1 listening position +
front/back/left/right)

Multi measure
(2 listening positions +
front/back)

b
c a e
d

c
a b
d

Angle/Height Measure
Enables/disables the angle/height measurement.

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

Follow the procedure below to take a measurement when the “Multi

HDMI OUT

Measure” box is unchecked. It takes about 5 minutes to perform the
SCENE

measurement.

Y
• If any error message (such as ERROR 1) or warning message (such as WARNING 1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.65) or “Warning messages” (p.66).

INPUT
TUNER

NET

RED

GREEN

• Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the TV.

BLUETOOTH

USB

PRESET
YELLOW

Settings

BLUE

Checked
Cursor keys
ENTER

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

RETURN

Unchecked
(default)

Enables the angle/height measurement. The unit will
measure angle of each speaker and height of the presence
speakers at the listening position, and correct the speaker
parameters so that CINEMA DSP can create more effective
sound fields.
Disables the angle/height measurement.

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Start” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to
start the measurement immediately.

X
To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN or VOLUME keys.

The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

finishes.

VOLUME

(when angle/height measurement is disabled)

ENHANCER

Proceed to Step 3.

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

TUNING

(when angle/height measurement is enabled)
Proceed to Step 2.

Place the microphone base at the listening position and set the
YPAO microphone to the position “1”.

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

SCENE

TUNER

NET

RED

GREEN

Microphone
base

INPUT
BLUETOOTH

USB

PRESET
YELLOW

BLUE

Perform the angle/height measurement.

Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.
Pole

ENTER

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.

Microphone base

ENHANCER

• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
finishes.

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

TUNING

Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.

In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.

Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.

To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys to
select “Save” and press ENTER.

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

SCENE

TUNER

NET

INPUT

The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.

BLUETOOTH

USB

PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

BLUE

X
To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “Cancel”.
Cursor keys
ENTER

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

RETURN

Caution

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

ENHANCER

To check the measurement results, use the cursor keys to
After confirming the result, press RETURN to return to the

MEMORY

BAND

select “Measurement result” and press ENTER.

STRAIGHT

TUNING

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

TUNING

“Measurement Finished” screen.

X
For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.64).

The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).

Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

SCENE

Follow the procedure below to take a measurement when the “Multi
Measure” box is checked. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8

When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the

listening positions.

following screen appears automatically.

(when angle/height measurement is disabled)

• If any error message (such as ERROR 1) or warning message (such as WARNING 1)

NET

Proceed to Step 5.

appears, see “Error messages” (p.65) or “Warning messages” (p.66).

INPUT
TUNER

When the measurements at the positions you want to
measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select
“Skip” and press ENTER.

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP

• Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the TV.

BLUETOOTH

USB

PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Start” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to

Cursor keys
ENTER

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

start the measurement immediately.

RETURN

(when angle/height measurement is enabled)

To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN or VOLUME keys.

The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

the first position finishes.

VOLUME

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

TUNING

Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position
and press ENTER.
Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to
8) have been taken.

Proceed to Step 4.

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

Perform the angle/height measurement.

Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.

Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.
Pole

HDMI OUT

SCENE

TUNER

NET

INPUT
BLUETOOTH

USB

Microphone base
PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

Place the microphone base at the listening position you will be

position “1”.

ENTER

In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.

seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to the

Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

ENHANCER

Microphone
base

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.

TUNING

Y
• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
finishes.

To check the measurement results, use the cursor keys to
select “Measurement result” and press ENTER.

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.64).
SCENE

To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to
select “Save” and press ENTER.

INPUT
TUNER

NET

BLUETOOTH

USB

PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

Cursor keys
ENTER

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “Cancel”.

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

ENHANCER

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

TUNING

Caution
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).

Checking the measurement results
You can check the YPAO measurement results.

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

Angle
Horizontal angle of each speaker at the listening position
(horizontal)
Height

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

NET

RED

GREEN

X
“Angle (horizontal)” and “Height” show the results when angle/height
measurement is performed.

X
You can also select “YPAO Result” (p.135) from “Speaker” (p.131) in the “Setup”
menu, which displays the previous measurement results.

INPUT
TUNER

After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Measurement result” and press ENTER.

SCENE

To finish checking the results and return to the previous
screen, press RETURN.

The following screen appears.

BLUETOOTH

USB

Height of the presence speakers above the level of the
listening position

PRESET
YELLOW

BLUE

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments

SETUP

a
b

Cursor keys
ENTER

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and
reload the previous YPAO adjustments.

RETURN

a Measurement result items

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not

c The number of measured positions (when multi measure is
performed)

ENHANCER

In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker” and then “YPAO
Result” (p.135).

b Measurement result details

VOLUME

1
2

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press
ENTER.

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

TUNING

Use the cursor keys to select an item.
Polarity of each speaker
Wiring

Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)

Size

Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.

Distance

Distance from the listening position to each speaker

Level

Output level adjustment for each speaker

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Error messages

Error message

Remedy

ERROR 1

If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform

Front speakers are not
detected.

YPAO again.

ERROR 2
One of the surround speakers
cannot be detected.
ERROR 3

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and
then check the speaker connections.

One of the front presence
speakers cannot be detected.
ERROR 4
One of the surround back
speakers cannot be detected.
ERROR 5
The noise is too loud.
ERROR 6
Surround back speakers are
connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.
ERROR 7
The YPAO microphone has
been removed.
ERROR 8
The YPAO microphone cannot
detect test tones.
ERROR 9
Canceled by user operation

Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If you select “Proceed”, YPAO takes the
measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back
speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the
unit, and then reconnect the speakers.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow
the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow
the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If this error
occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To
cancel the measurement, select “Quit”.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit.
If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha
An internal error has occurred. dealer or service center.
ERROR 10

ERROR 11
One of the rear presence
speakers cannot be detected.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and
then check the speaker connections.

Warning messages

Warning message

Remedy
Select “Wiring” in “Measurement result” (p.64) and check the cable
connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”.

If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement
results by following on-screen instructions.

WARNING 1

If the speaker is connected incorrectly:

However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal

A speaker cable may be
connected with the reverse
polarity (+/-).

Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.

speaker settings.

WARNING 2
A speaker is placed more than
24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
WARNING 3
There are significant volume
differences between the
speakers.

If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message
may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case,
you can ignore the message.
Select “Distance” in “Measurement result” (p.64) and move the speaker
identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening
position.
Select “Level” in “Measurement result” (p.64) and check the speaker
identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage environment and
cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the
subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with
specifications that are as similar as possible.

10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.

Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the
unit.
Internet
Wireless router

Modem

Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
The unit

For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.68).

Connecting the unit to a wireless network
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network.

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

Select a connection method according to your environment.

4
5

HDMI OUT

Use the cursor keys to select “Network”.
Use the cursor keys to select “Network Connection” and
press ENTER.

• Using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.73)
SCENE

• Sharing the iOS device setting (p.68)

• Using the WPS push button configuration (p.69)
5

TUNER

NET

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)”
and select “OK”.

• Using other connection methods (p.70)

INPUT
BLUETOOTH

USB

■ Sharing the iOS device setting

PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

You can easily set up a wireless connection by applying the connection

BLUE

SETUP

settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch).
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a

Cursor keys
ENTER

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

wireless router.

If you set up a wireless connection with this method, the following settings will be

The checkmark indicates the current setting.

initialized.

– Network settings

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

– Bluetooth settings

Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.

– USB and network items registered as shortcuts
ENHANCER

– Internet radio stations register to “Favorites”
– Account information for the network services

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

TUNING

X
• You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later. (The following procedure is a setup example
for iOS 8.)
• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router
(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.

1
2

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Y
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check “Share Wi-Fi

Press SETUP.
En

After checking the on-screen message, use the cursor

You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS

keys and ENTER to select “NEXT”.

button.

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access

SCENE

point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.

1
2

INPUT
TUNER

NET

■ Using the WPS push button configuration

BLUETOOTH

USB

PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds.
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display.

On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in

the Wi-Fi screen.

Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access
point).

Cursor keys
ENTER

When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
the front display.

TOP
MENU

HOME

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

connection method.

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

The name of the unit

ENHANCER

10 Check the network currently selected and tap “Next”.

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

TUNING

Tap here to start setup

The network currently selected

When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to
the selected network (access point).

About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.

■ Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push button
MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

TUNER

NET

RED

GREEN

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video

BLUETOOTH

USB

PRESET
YELLOW

Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the

BLUE

Cursor keys
ENTER

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

The following connection methods are available.

unit via HDMI.

SETUP

HOME

connection method and select “NEXT”.

from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

INPUT

TOP
MENU

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select the desired

wireless network settings.

1
2

SCENE

configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the

3
4
5

WPS Button

You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button
while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions
displayed on the TV screen.

Use the cursor keys to select “Network” and press ENTER.

Share Wi-Fi
Settings (iOS)

See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.68).

Use the cursor keys to select “Network Connection” and

Access Point Scan

You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an
access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an
access point” (p.71).

Press SETUP.

press ENTER.

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

ENHANCER

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)”

Manual Setting

and select “OK”.

STRAIGHT

You can set up a wireless connection by entering the
required information (such as SSID) manually.
For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless
connection manually” (p.71).

MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

TUNING

PIN Code

X
The checkmark indicates the current setting.

You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s
PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The
method is available if the wireless router (access point)
supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings,
see “Using the PIN code” (p.72).

Searching for an access point
MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

Setting up the wireless connection manually

If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit

If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless

starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available

connection setting screen appears on the TV.

access points appears on the TV screen.

You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

SCENE

security key for your network.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired

access point and select “NEXT”.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the
access point and select “NEXT”.

The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.

INPUT
TUNER

NET

BLUETOOTH

USB

PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
and select “NEXT”.

BLUE

SETUP

Cursor keys
ENTER

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the security
method of the access point and select “NEXT”.

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

ENHANCER

Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press
ENTER to start the connection process.

STRAIGHT

When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on

MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

the TV screen.

TUNING

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
connection method.

Settings
None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key

If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available

and select “NEXT”.

access points appears on the TV screen.

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

Using the PIN code

If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available. Proceed

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

to Step 4.

SCENE

If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26

hexadecimal digits.

If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or

TUNER

NET

access point and select “NEXT”.

BLUETOOTH

USB

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.

64 hexadecimal digits.

INPUT

Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access
point).

PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the

BLUE

wireless router (access point).

SETUP

Cursor keys
ENTER

Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press
ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

the TV screen.

Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another

ENTER to start the connection process.
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

connection method.

VOLUME

When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on

ENHANCER

the TV screen.
STRAIGHT

If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is

MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.

TUNING

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

11 Connecting to the MusicCast network
MusicCast is a brand new wireless musical solution from Yamaha,

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

allowing you to share music among all of your rooms with a variety of

HDMI OUT

SCENE

your mobile device and tap “Setup”.

music streaming service anywhere in your house with one easy-to-use

application. For more details and a lineup of MusicCast compatible

products, visit the Yamaha website.

TUNER

NET

• Seamlessly control all MusicCast compatible devices with the

RED

GREEN

BLUETOOTH

USB

dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.

If you have already connected other MusicCast compatible devices to the
network, tap “Settings” and then “Add New Device”.

YELLOW

BLUE

Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application
following the on screen instructions, then hold down
CONNECT on the front panel of the unit for 5 seconds.

• Link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a different

PRESET

Tap the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application icon on

devices. You can enjoy music from your smartphone, PC, NAS drive and
1

INPUT

room and play them back simultaneously.
• Play back music from music streaming services. (The compatible music
streaming services may differ depending on your region and product.)

MusicCast CONTROLLER
TOP
MENU

HOME

CONNECT

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application
following the onscreen instructions to set up the network.

VOLUME

ENHANCER

To use the network features on the MusicCast compatible device, you

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

playback.

need the dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” for the
TUNING

BAND

TUNING

operation. Search for the free application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on
the App Store or Google Play and install it to your device.

Adding the unit to the MusicCast network
Follow the procedure below to add the unit to the MusicCast network.
You can also configure the unit’s wireless settings at once.

Y
• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
• When Pure Direct is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and USB
cannot be delivered.
• If you configure the unit’s wireless settings with this method, the Wireless LAN
indicator of the front display lights up when the unit is connecting to a network (even
if a wired connection is used).
• You can interlock the power of MusicCast devices with the power of the unit
(MusicCast master). For details, see “MusicCast Link Power Interlock” (p.149) in the

“Setup” menu.

• The SSID and security key for your network will be needed.
• If your router supports multiple SSID’s (network names), connect the mobile device
to the first access point (“SSID 1”, etc.).

Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application to

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
En

PLAYBACK
MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

Basic playback procedure

SCENE

Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD
player) connected to the unit.

INPUT

Input selection keys
TUNER

NET

BLUETOOTH

USB

PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

2
3

Selecting an HDMI output jack

Use the input selection keys to select an input source.

Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for
signal output changes.

Start playback on the external device or select a radio

HDMI OUT Sel.
OUT 1+2

station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the corresponding

OUT 1+2

pages.
TOP
MENU

HOME

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

Russia models only) (p.86)

ENHANCER

• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and

MUTE

STRAIGHT

Russia models only) (p.92)

MEMORY

TUNING

Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.

BAND

Off

• Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and

VOLUME

TUNING

Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.

X
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.75).
• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution

• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.96)

supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.97)

connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack,

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.101)

the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
• When the MAIN/ZONE switch on the remote control is set to “ZONE2” or “ZONE4”,

• Listening to Internet radio (p.105)

pressing the HDMI OUT key can enable (OUT 3) or disable (OFF) the HDMI OUT3 jack

• Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.108)

Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and
HDMI OUT 2 jacks.

OUT 2

East and Russia models) (p.83)

L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

OUT 1

• Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

VOL.

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

X
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu.

output.

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source,

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

You can use up to 8 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch
SCENE

them depending on a playback source.

NET

PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

The SCENE name appears on the front display and on the TV.

ENTER

2
TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

Input

AV1

AV2

AV3

AV4

SCENE

Input

AV5

AV6

AV7

AV1

Press numbered key (1 to 8), and then the input source
and settings registered to the corresponding scene are
directly selected. The unit turns on automatically when it
is in standby mode.
Alternatively, you can also select a registered scene by
pressing SCENE repeatedly.

BLUETOOTH

USB

SCENE

INPUT
TUNER

Zone4

sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.

RETURN

X
• You can check the detailed settings of each scene from the “Scene Setting” screen
(p.142) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can also register and recall SCENE 1-4 with the SCENE key on the unit’s front
panel.

To select a desired SCENE name, press ENTER.

Registering a scene

• To cancel the operation of selecting a registered scene, press RETURN.

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

• The operation is canceled automatically when you have not operated the unit

VOLUME

for the 30 seconds.

ENHANCER

Set the unit to the condition (such as input source and
sound program) that you want to assign to a scene.

By default, the following input settings are registered for each scene.
STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

Main Zone, Zone2 and Zone3
TUNING

SCENE

Input

AV1

TUNER

AUDIO2

NET RADIO

SCENE

Input

AV2

AV3

AUDIO 1

SERVER

Hold down the desired numbered key (1-8) until “SET
Complete (Setting Complete)” appears on the front
display and on the TV.

SCENE1
SET Complete

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

X
• You can configure more detailed scene assignments in “Scene Setting” in the “Setup”
menu. For details, see “Scene Setting” (p.142).
• You can change the SCENE name displayed on the front display or on the TV. For
details, see “Scene Rename” (p.142).

Selecting the sound mode
MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround

decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite

• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the

HDMI OUT

sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback).
SCENE

Enabling SURROUND:AI.

• Press AI.

NET

• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.15) or at the “Information” screen in

This mode lets you enjoy the optimum surround effect according to AI

INPUT
TUNER

analysis as well as a compelling sense of realism (p.77).

BLUETOOTH

USB

PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

Selecting a sound program suitable for movies and music

BLUE

• Press PROGRAM repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies and games, as well as for listening to
music sources or for stereo playback.
TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

VOLUME

ENHANCER

SUR. DECODE
ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

PROGRAM
AI

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

BAND

“Sound” menu (p.136).
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.

TUNING

the “Sound” menu (p.136).

Precaution for enjoying Dolby Atmos®
• Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus in
the following situations. (Dolby Atmos PCM format is always decoded as
Dolby Atmos.)
– Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.
– Headphones are used (2-channel playback).
• When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such
as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.80) does not work.

Selecting a surround decoder
Precaution for enjoying DTS:X™

• Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel sources (p.81).

• When DTS:X contents are played back, you can adjust the volume of dialogue
sounds in “DTS Dialogue Control” (p.121) in the “Option” menu.
• When the DTS:X decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such as
Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.80) does not work.

Switching to the straight decode mode
• Press STRAIGHT.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels
(p.81).
Enabling Pure Direct
• Press PURE DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.82).
Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and
breadth (p.82).

Playing back with surround effects
optimized for the scene (SURROUND:AI)

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields
(CINEMA DSP HD3)

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

With SURROUND:AI, the AI incorporated in the DSP creates the optimal

HDMI OUT

surround effect for the scene of the content.
SCENE

INPUT
TUNER

NET

BLUETOOTH

USB

GREEN

YELLOW

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize

such as “dialogue”, “background music”, “ambient sounds” and “sound

Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP HD3). It allows you to

effects” as well as optimized in real time to create a compelling sense of

easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in

realism.

your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields.

PRESET
RED

Scenes are instantaneously analyzed with a focus on sound elements

BLUE

Sound program category

Press AI.

MUSIC

Each time you press the key, SURROUND:AI is enabled or disabled.

HD 3

• When PURE DIRECT is enabled, SURROUND:AI is not available.
• When SURROUND:AI is enabled, the straight decode mode, PROGRAM key and the
surround decoders are not available.
TOP
MENU

HOME

Sound program
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up

surround speakers to produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front
presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend using front presence

VOLUME

speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence
speakers for further spatial sounds) (p.141).

ENHANCER

• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and

STRAIGHT

surround speakers to produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front

MEMORY

TUNING

FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1
SR

• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and
AI

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOL.

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

CLASSICAL
Hall in Vienna

BAND

presence speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers (p.141).

TUNING

• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back
speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using
the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field (p.141).
• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)

ENTERTAINMENT

The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV
Sports

This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and
light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices
are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is
realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a
suitable space.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games.
The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are
right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic
and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds
depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background
music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more
spatial sound field.

Music Video

This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you
were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to
the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that
emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that
reproduces the space of a big live hall.

Recital/Opera

This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and
emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations of
an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic
positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is
relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the
inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of
opera entertainment.

programs, and games.

MOVIE THEATER

Standard

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without
disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio. Its design is
based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is
surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear.

Spectacle

This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions.
It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and
boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds
to powerful loud booms.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest
Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created
virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects,
and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure
movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on
reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space
expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and
powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the
separation of the channels.

Drama

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie
genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are
modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are
reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the
dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods.

Mono Movie

This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an
atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space
with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original
audio.

Enhanced

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the dynamic sound transition
of 3D object audio. Its design is based on the concept of a movie theater with
multi-top speakers, in which the audience is overwhelmed by the natural and
powerful sound effects.

■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)

LIVE/CLUB

The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.

Village Vanguard

The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling
makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the center.

Warehouse Loft

The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete
walls clearly with a lot of energy.

Cellar Club

This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey
atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you
feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los
Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.

The Bottom Line

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous
New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a
sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

You can also select stereo playback.

CLASSICAL

Hall in Munich

This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that
uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread
richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center
left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox
shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely
complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich
sound.

Hall in Amsterdam

The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.
Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.

Church in Freiburg

Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed
tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling
enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus,
the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of
the church.

STEREO

Church in
Royaumont

This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a
beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of
Paris.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience
hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly
music and chamber music.

2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output
from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).

9ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then
outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field
and is ideal for background music at parties.

Y
CINEMA DSP HD3 (p.77) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.80) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “9ch Stereo” is selected.

■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)

■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)

If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) when no surround
speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to
reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo

field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to

headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound

enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.

program or a surround decoder.

X
When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you
can place them in the front (p.24) and enjoy multichannel surround sound using Virtual
CINEMA FRONT.
When “Layout (Surround)” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the
virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound
with the 5 speakers placed in the front.

X
When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

Enjoying unprocessed playback

PARTY
T

processing.

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo

bDsur

Dolby Surround decoder. Expands the sound using a
method optimized for the layout of the installed
speakers. It produces the extended surround sound
optimized for your speaker system. A real acoustic
space (including overhead) will be created especially
when objectbased audio (such as Dolby Atmos
content) is played.

Neural:X

DTS Neural:X decoder. Expands the sound using a
method optimized for the layout of the installed
speakers. It produces the extended surround sound
optimized for your speaker system. A real acoustic
space (including overhead) will be created especially
when objectbased audio (such as DTS:X content) is
played.

Neo:6 Cinema

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.

Neo:6 Music

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.

PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled
or disabled.

STRAIGHT

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround back

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

speakers are used, select a surround decoder (p.81).
• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

FRONT (p.80) works when multichannel source is played back.

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

TUNING

■ Playing back in extended multichannel
(surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel or multichannel sources.

L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Auto

produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources.

BLUETOOTH

USB

VOL.

Uses the decoder automatically selected by input
source. The DTS Neural:X decoder is selected for DTS
sources and the Dolby Surround decoder is selected
for other sources.

sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and

INPUT
NET

SUR. DECODE
†‡ Dsur

HDMI OUT

SCENE

TUNER

Press SUR. DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes.

You can play back input sources without any sound field effect

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP

Y
• When the Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder is selected, virtual surround

processing (such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.80) does not work.

• We recommend Dolby Surround while network streaming is Dolby contents.
• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system and
the selected decode type (p.137).
• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.178).

• The Neural:X decoder does not work with Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD signals.
Select “Auto” or “bDsur” for these signals.

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound
(Pure Direct)
MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

When Pure Direct is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with

Playing back digitally compressed formats
(such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound
(Compressed Music Enhancer)

the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other
SCENE

circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound

quality.

INPUT
TUNER

NET

PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before

Press PURE DIRECT.

it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound

Each time you press the key, Pure Direct is enabled or disabled.

BLUETOOTH

USB

Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound,

PURE DIRECT

BLUE

modes.
In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of

VOL.
L

uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) when

“Hi-Res Mode” (p.122) in the “Option” menu is set to “On” (default).

Y
When Pure Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Selecting sound programs

Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is

– Operating the Setup menu and “Option” menu
TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

enabled or disabled.

– Using the multi-zone function
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

ENHANCER

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

“ENHANCER” lights up

STRAIGHT

MEMORY

BAND

Enhancer On
Hi-Res ENHANCER

VOLUME

ENHANCER

TUNING

Press ENHANCER.

Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.

TUNING

– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz
– DSD audio

X
You can also use “Enhancer” (p.122) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.

Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio

Setting the frequency steps

stations.
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)

Y
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used.

At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending

• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas.

on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.

1
2

Set the unit to standby mode.
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”.

TUNER FRQ STEP
FM50/AM9

4
5

Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.

Selecting a frequency for reception

1
2

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

SCENE

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

preset numbers.

VOL.

You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using “FM
Auto Preset” (p.93).

INPUT
TUNER

NET

BLUETOOTH

USB

GREEN

TUNER

PRESET

PRESET
RED

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their

Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).

FM 87.50MHz

Registering favorite radio stations
(presets)

YELLOW

BLUE

Press TUNING to set a frequency.
Hold down the key for about a second to search stations

■ Registering a radio station manually

automatically.

Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

FM 98.50MHz
STEREO TUNED

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.84) to
tune into the desired radio station.

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
TOP
MENU

HOME

“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio

• You can switch between “Stereo” and “Monaural” for FM radio reception in “FM

station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,

Mode” (p.124) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio

each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty

station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.

(unused) preset number after the most recently registered

• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio. For details

number.

see “Video Out” (p.123).

Preset number

TUNING

Preset

BAND
TUNING

STEREO TUNED

01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset OK

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

Preset
STEREO TUNED

01:Empty
FM 98.50MHz

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

■ Registering radio stations automatically
(FM Auto Preset)
Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals.

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

1
2
3

SCENE

INPUT
TUNER

NET

RED

GREEN

BLUETOOTH

USB

TUNER

YELLOW

Cursor keys
ENTER

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Y
■ Clearing preset stations

Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.

RETURN

When the Auto Preset process finishes, “Finished” appears at the

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
currently selected is displayed on the front display.

VOLUME

2
3
4
5

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

BAND

VOL.

To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.

ENHANCER

TUNING

01:FM 98.50MHz

STEREO TUNED

“Preset” screen and the “Option” menu closes automatically.

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio

“No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.
TOP
MENU

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Preset

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.

keys or PRESET to select a preset number.
OPTION

1
2

station.

To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor

BLUE

Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.

Press OPTION.

PRESET

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

■ Selecting a preset station

TUNING

Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset”.
Use the cursor keys to select a preset station to be cleared
and press ENTER.
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next
in-use preset number is displayed.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

■ Clearing all preset stations
Clear all the radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency

SCENE

currently selected is displayed on the front display.

INPUT
TUNER

NET

RED

GREEN

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

BLUETOOTH

USB

TUNER

PRESET
YELLOW

BLUE

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

2
3
4
5

Listening to DAB radio (Australia,
U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia
models only)
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound
and more stable reception compared to analog signals. The unit can also
receive DAB+ (an upgraded version of DAB) that allows for more stations

Press OPTION.

using MPEG-4 audio codec (AAC+), which has a more efficient

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear All Preset”.

transmission method.

Y
• The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
• Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently being

Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.

covered. For a list of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check
WorldDAB online at http://www.worlddab.org/.

If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.

X
For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the radio antennas” (p.49).

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

TUNING

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

Preparing the DAB tuning

Selecting a DAB radio station for reception

Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below to

You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the initial

perform an initial scan.

scan.

HDMI OUT

1
2

SCENE

NET

RED

GREEN

Press BAND to select the DAB band.
The following message appears on the front panel if you have not

INPUT
TUNER

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

BLUETOOTH

USB

performed an initial scan yet.

TUNER

Init Scan
Press [ENTER]

PRESET
YELLOW

BLUE

ENTER

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

available.
• When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”.

VOL.

Secondary station

DAB 2

BBC National

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

DAB

BBC Radio 4

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

STRAIGHT

X
You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by

MEMORY

BAND

BBC Radio 4
Daily Service

• “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not

VOLUME

ENHANCER

TUNING

Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio station.

first DAB radio station as stored in station order.

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

Press BAND to select the DAB band.

DAB

When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the
AI

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

VOL.

Press ENTER to start an initial scan.

Init Scan
>>>------- 30%

1
2
3

TUNING

selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.123) in the “Option” menu.

• If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1
BAND
TUNING

appears again. Press ENTER to start an initial scan again.
• You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.90).
• To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored,
select “Init Scan” (p.119) in the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan
again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will
be cleared.

Registering favorite DAB radio stations
(presets)

■ Selecting a preset DAB radio station
Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset number.

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you have

HDMI OUT

registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
SCENE

preset numbers.

TUNER

NET

X
You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands.

1
2
3

BLUETOOTH

USB

TUNER
PRESET

PRESET
GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

OPTION

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

■ Clearing preset DAB radio stations

Hold down MEMORY for seconds.

each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty

Clear DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency

number.

currently selected is displayed on the front display.
Preset number

MEMORY

TUNING

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

(unused) preset number after the most recently registered

STRAIGHT

BAND

“No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered.

VOLUME

ENHANCER

TUNING

(p.87) to tune into the desired DAB radio station.

station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception”

The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

PRESET:01

Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number.

2
HOME

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB radio

■ Registering a DAB radio station as presets

Cursor keys
ENTER

TOP
MENU

Press BAND to select the DAB band.

station.

INPUT

RED

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Preset
BAND

01:BBC Radio 4
Preset OK

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into

2
3
4

Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select a preset DAB radio station to

the desired DAB radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then

be cleared and press ENTER.

press MEMORY again.

If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next
in-use preset number is displayed.

“Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use)

Preset

02:Empty
BBC Radio 4

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

■ Clearing all preset DAB radio stations

Displaying the DAB information

Clear all the DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is tuned

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency

SCENE

currently selected is displayed on the front display.

INPUT
TUNER

NET

BLUETOOTH

USB

TUNER

PRESET
RED

GREEN

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

YELLOW

BLUE

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

2
3
4
5

Press OPTION.

HOME

1
2

Tune into the desired DAB radio station.
Press INFO on the front panel.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.

Info
Program Type

Use the cursor keys to select “Clear All Preset”.

L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the

If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the

displayed item appears.
DAB

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

Classic FM
Classic Music

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Information

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

VOL.

Item name

“Option” menu closes automatically.
TOP
MENU

into a DAB radio station.

BAND

TUNING

DLS
(Dynamic Label
Segment)

Information on the current station

Ensemble Label

Ensemble name

Program Type

Station genre

Date And Time

Current date and time

Audio Mode

Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate

CH Label/Freq.

Channel label and frequency

Signal Quality

Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best])

DSP Program

Sound mode name

Audio Decoder

Decoder name

X
Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB radio
station.

Checking reception strength of each DAB
channel label
MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (0 [none] to

HDMI OUT

100 [best]).
SCENE

INPUT
TUNER

NET

BLUETOOTH

USB

TUNER

PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

1
2
3
4
5

Press BAND to select the DAB band.
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Tune AID” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select the desired DAB channel
label.

Tune AID
12B Level: 80

RETURN

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

DAB channel label

VOLUME

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Reception strength

To exit from the menu, press RETURN.

MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

TUNING

BAND

■ DAB frequency information
The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
Frequency

Channel label

Frequency

Channel label

174.928 MHz

225.648 MHz

12B

176.640 MHz

227.360 MHz

12C

178.352 MHz

229.072 MHz

12D

180.064 MHz

230.784 MHz

13A

181.936 MHz

232.496 MHz

13B

183.648 MHz

234.208 MHz

13C

185.360 MHz

235.776 MHz

13D

187.072 MHz

237.488 MHz

13E

188.928 MHz

239.200 MHz

13F

190.640 MHz

192.352 MHz

194.064 MHz

195.936 MHz

197.648 MHz

199.360 MHz

201.072 MHz

202.928 MHz

204.640 MHz

206.352 MHz

208.064 MHz

209.936 MHz

10A

211.648 MHz

10B

213.360 MHz

10C

215.072 MHz

10D

216.928 MHz

11A

218.640 MHz

11B

220.352 MHz

11C

222.064 MHz

11D

223.936 MHz

12A

Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models
only)
MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting

HDMI OUT

Y
If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the DAB/FM
antennas.

INPUT
TUNER

NET

RED

GREEN

Selecting a frequency for reception

from registered radio stations.

SCENE

BLUETOOTH

USB

1
2

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the FM band.

TUNER

FM 87.50MHz

PRESET
YELLOW

VOL.

BLUE

Press TUNING to set a frequency.
Hold down the key for about a second to search stations
automatically.

TOP
MENU

HOME

FM 98.50MHz

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
STEREO TUNED

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.

VOLUME

“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

• You can switch between “Stereo” and “Monaural” for FM radio reception in “FM
TUNING

BAND

TUNING

Mode” (p.124) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio
station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.

BAND
TUNING

• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio. For details
see “Video Out” (p.123).

Registering favorite FM radio stations
(presets)

Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals.

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you have

HDMI OUT

registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
SCENE

NET

You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using “FM
Auto Preset” (p.85).

BLUETOOTH

USB

GREEN

TUNER
PRESET

PRESET
RED

Preset function.

INPUT

YELLOW

BLUE

X
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are registered automatically by the Auto

preset numbers.

TUNER

■ Registering radio stations automatically
(FM Auto Preset)

■ Registering a radio station manually
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

1
2
3

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

RETURN

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.92) to

keys or PRESET to select a preset number.

Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty

ENHANCER

(unused) preset number after the most recently registered

STRAIGHT

MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

number.
Preset number

TUNING

BAND

Preset
STEREO TUNED

01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset OK

To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.

To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor

tune into the desired radio station.

Press OPTION.

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.

When the Auto Preset process finishes, “Finished” appears at the
“Preset” screen and the “Option” menu closes automatically.

■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

1
2
3

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the FM band
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.

Preset
STEREO TUNED

01:Empty
FM 98.50MHz

Preset

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

STEREO TUNED

01:FM 98.50MHz

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Y
“No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
En

■ Clearing preset stations

■ Clearing all preset stations

Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.

Clear all the radio stations registered to the preset numbers.

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

SCENE

INPUT
TUNER

NET

BLUETOOTH

USB

TUNER

PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

OPTION

2
3
4
5

Cursor keys
ENTER

TOP
MENU

HOME

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
currently selected is displayed on the front display.

Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset”.
Use the cursor keys to select a preset station to be cleared

2
3
4
5

Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear All Preset”.
Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.

and press ENTER.

If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the

If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next

“Option” menu closes automatically.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

VOLUME

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

BAND

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

currently selected is displayed on the front display.

ENHANCER

TUNING

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency

in-use preset number is displayed.

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

TUNING

Radio Data System tuning

Program Service

Program service name

Program Type

Current program type

Radio Text

Information on the current program

Clock Time

Current time

Type”, “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting

DSP Program

Sound mode name

station.

Audio Decoder

Decoder name

(U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The
unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program

■ Displaying the Radio Data System information

“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station
does not provide the Radio Data System service.

Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station.

X
We recommend using “FM Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.93).

Press INFO on the front panel.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

STEREO TUNED

Info
Program Type

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Item name

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears.
Frequency (always displayed)

STEREO TUNED

FM 98.50MHz
CLASSICS

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Information

Playing back music via Bluetooth
You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

smartphones) on the unit.

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

Playing back Bluetooth device music on the
unit

SCENE

Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection
between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and
play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit.
The unit

INPUT
TUNER

NET

BLUETOOTH

USB

BLUETOOTH

PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

Bluetooth device
(such as smartphones)

The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.

• To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

BLUE

• Stand the wireless antenna upright for connecting to a Bluetooth device wirelessly.

source.

For details, see “Preparing the wireless antenna” (p.51).

X
For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”

HOME

A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

made.

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.

VOLUME

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

BAND

On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback.
The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is

MEMORY

TUNING

On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of
the unit) from the available device list.

(p.182).
TOP
MENU

Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input

TUNING

Playback operation
keys

displayed on the TV.

X
• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically
connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth
connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth connection.
• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations.
– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.
– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
– Select “Disconnect” in “Bluetooth” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can use the playback operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
control to control playback.

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit.

Connecting a USB storage device

The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format).

For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.182).

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
The unit (front)
(CONNECT)

PROGRAM
ENTER

RETURN

HELP

PHONES
USB

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

USB storage device

USB
Connected

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

X
If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears
in the front display.

Y
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables.
• The unit cannot charge USB devices while it is in standby mode.

Playback of USB storage device contents
MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

displayed.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

BLUETOOTH

USB

PRESET
GREEN

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is

and start playback.

INPUT

RED

Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents

TV screen.

NET

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the

SCENE

TUNER

YELLOW

BLUE

X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen,

Cursor keys
ENTER

hold down RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

RETURN

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is

• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by

displayed.
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

selecting the shortcut numbers (p.116).

VOLUME

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

TUNING

■ Browse screen
MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

a
b

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

■ Playback screen

HDMI OUT

a
d

SCENE

TUNER

NET

b
c

INPUT

GREEN

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.100), playback status (such as
play/pause) and elapsed time.

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.100).

PRESET
RED

a Status indicators

BLUETOOTH

USB

YELLOW

b Contents list

BLUE

Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Cursor keys
ENTER

HOME

d Operation menu

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

You can use the playback operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
VOLUME

1 Page Down

ENHANCER

Now Playing

STRAIGHT

BAND

Moves to the playback screen.

10 Pages Up

MEMORY

TUNING

Function

1 Page Up

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
TUNING

Playback operation
keys

Displays the artist name, album name and song title.

c Item number/total
Use the cursor keys to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

TOP
MENU

b Playback information

10 Pages Down

X
When “Video Out” in the “Option” menu is set to except “Off”, you can close the browse
screen by pressing the left cursor key. To display the browse screen again, press any
cursor key. For details on see “Video Out” (p.123).

control to control playback.

■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage
device contents.

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

SCENE

OPTION.

NET

RED

GREEN

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle/Repeat” and press
ENTER.

INPUT
TUNER

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

BLUETOOTH

USB

PRESET
YELLOW

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

BLUE

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

“Repeat” (Repeat) and select a setting.
Item

RETURN

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

VOLUME

Setting
Off (Off)

Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.

Off (Off)

Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current
album (folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

Function

MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

Repeat
(Repeat)

TUNING

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

100

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
You can play back music files stored on your media servers on the unit.

■ For a PC or a NAS with other media server software
installed

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.51). You can check whether

Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing

the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.146) in the

settings.

“Setup” menu.
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network
connection.

X
For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.182).

Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or media servers, first you need to configure the
media sharing setting on each music server.

■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed
The setting procedure may vary depending on the PC and Windows Media Player version (The
following procedure is a setup example for Windows Media Player 12).

1
2
3
4
5

Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name.
Click “OK” to exit.

X
For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.

101

Playback of PC music contents
MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is

playback.

displayed.

You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

SCENE

TUNER

NET

RED

GREEN

INPUT

Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input
source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

NET
BLUETOOTH

USB

PRESET
YELLOW

BLUE

X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen, hold down

Cursor keys
ENTER

RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

RETURN

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)

during playback, playback stops automatically.

If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the

playback screen is displayed.
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

ENHANCER

MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press
ENTER.

STRAIGHT

• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.116).

VOLUME

TUNING

102

■ Browse screen
MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

a
b

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

■ Playback screen

HDMI OUT

a
d

SCENE

TUNER

NET

b
c

INPUT

a Status indicators

BLUETOOTH

USB

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.104), playback status (such as
play/pause) and elapsed time.

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.104).
PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

b Contents list

BLUE

Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER to confirm the selection.
Cursor keys
ENTER

HOME

d Operation menu

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

You can use the playback operation keys (a, s, d, h, j, f, g) on the

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down

VOLUME

ENHANCER

Now Playing

MEMORY

BAND

Moves to the playback screen.

10 Pages Up

STRAIGHT

TUNING

Function

1 Page Up

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
TUNING

Playback operation
keys

Displays the artist name, album name and song title.

c Item number/total
Use the cursor keys to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

TOP
MENU

b Playback information

10 Pages Down

103

remote control to control playback.

■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
music content.

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

SCENE

OPTION.

NET

RED

GREEN

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle/Repeat” and press
ENTER.

INPUT
TUNER

When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press

BLUETOOTH

USB

PRESET
YELLOW

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

BLUE

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

“Repeat” (Repeat) and select a setting.
Item

RETURN

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

VOLUME

Setting
Off (Off)

Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.

Off (Off)

Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current
album (folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT

Function

MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

Repeat
(Repeat)

TUNING

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

104

Listening to Internet radio
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.51). You can check

SCENE

whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to

the unit in “Information” (p.146) in the “Network” menu.

• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.

NET

GREEN

Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input
source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

NET

• This service may be discontinued without notice.

BLUETOOTH

USB

• Folder names are different depending on the language.

PRESET
RED

• The unit uses the airable.Radio service. airable is a service of Tune In GmbH.

INPUT
TUNER

Playback of Internet radio

HDMI OUT

YELLOW

BLUE

Cursor keys
ENTER

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

RETURN

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

playback screen is displayed.
VOLUME

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

TUNING

X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.116).

105

■ Browse screen

■ Playback screen

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

SCENE

TUNER

NET

c
b

INPUT

Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an item
and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

a Playback indicator

a Contents list

BLUETOOTH

USB

BLUE

b Item number/total

Displays the station name, album name and song title.

c Operation menu
Cursor keys
ENTER

Use the cursor keys to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu

HOME

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

1 Page Down

Now Playing
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

Moves to the playback screen.

10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

ENHANCER

10 Pages Down
STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

TUNING

Playback operation
keys

X
• You can use the playback operation key (s) on the remote control to stop playback.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.

Function

1 Page Up
TOP
MENU

Displays the elapsed time.

b Playback information

106

Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites)
By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Favorites”, you

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

can quickly access to them from the “Favorites” folder in the browse

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

screen.

SCENE

TUNER

NET

You can also register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth input
source as shortcuts (p.116).

INPUT

■ Registering the station on the
browse/playback screen

BLUETOOTH

USB

PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

OPTION

screen or start playback of it to display the playback
screen.

Cursor keys
ENTER

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

2
3

Use the cursor key to select “Add to favorites” and press
The selected station is added to the “Favorites” folder.
Radio stations registered to favorites are displayed with “S”.

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

BAND

Press OPTION.

ENTER.

VOLUME

ENHANCER

TUNING

Select the desired Internet radio station in the browse

Browse screen

TUNING

X
To remove a station that is registered to favorites, select the station and then select
“Remove from favorites”.

107

Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents

iTunes

Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.

(wired or wireless)

Router

Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen
on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon appears.
iTunes (example)

(wired or wireless)

iOS (example)

The unit

iPhone/iPad/iPod touch

Y
If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check whether
the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.146) in

On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network
name of the unit) as the audio output device.

the “Setup” menu.
• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to connect.

Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

Select a song and start playback.

The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.

For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.182).

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

X
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby”
(p.147) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name”
(p.149) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from
iTunes/iPod, set “AirPlay Volume Interlock” (p.148) in the “Network” menu to “Off”.

Caution
When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could
result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop
playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately.

108

■ Playback screen
MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

SCENE

TUNER

NET

RED

GREEN

INPUT

a Playback indicator

BLUETOOTH

USB

Displays the elapsed/remaining time.
PRESET
YELLOW

b Playback information

BLUE

Displays the artist name, album name and song title.

X
You can use the playback operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
control to control playback.

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

TUNING

Playback operation
keys

109

Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the

■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms

unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4).

You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms.

For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can
listen to PC music in the study room (Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the guest room

Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers

(Zone3) and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4).
Video (HDMI)

• Audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you connect the device in each
zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.184).

Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)

Multi-zone configuration examples
Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we

Guest room
(Zone2)

recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center
about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements.
Living room (main zone)

■ Enjoying music in other rooms

Connections
TV: p.112

You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms.

Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.39
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.111

Enjoying videos/music using only a TV
Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)

Study room
(Zone2 and/or Zone3)

Video/audio (HDMI)

Living room (main zone)
Kitchen
(Zone2 or Zone4)

Connections
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.39
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.111
Living room (main zone)
Connection
TV: p.112

110

Preparing the multi zone system

Using an external amplifier
Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and

Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit.

connect speakers to the external amplifier.

Caution

The unit (rear)

• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external
amplifier.

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

• Ensure that the bare wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with
the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short
circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

AV 1

AV 2

(1 MOVIE)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

(1 MOVIE)

(5 STB)

(6 GAME)

AV 4

ZONE OUT
(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks

1
ARC

(5 STB)

AV 3

(6 GAME)

AV 4

COMPONENT VIDEO

A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

VIDEO

B AV 2

(5 STB)

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

(3 MUSIC)

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

R
2 OPTICAL

■ Connecting speakers to play back audio

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

SURROUND

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

DIO 4

Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2 or Zone3. The connection method varies

(R
SUB

R SURROUND

ZONE 2 /
F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /
R.PRESENSE

ANTENNA
(2 RADIO)

L
75ȍ

External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)

depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier).

Using the unit’s internal amplifier

Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see

“Connecting Zone2/3 speakers” (p.39).

AUDIO

Zone2 or Zone3

Main zone

Y
(RX-A3080 only)
You cannot use an external amplifier for Zone2 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are set to output front
presence channel audio in “Power Amp Assign” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu. Also, you cannot use an external
amplifier for Zone3 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are configured to output rear presence channel audio.

X
You can adjust the volume for Zone2 and Zone3 output with the unit. When using an external amplifier with
volume control, set “Volume” (p.150) in the “Setup” menu to “Fixed”.

111

■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio

• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is
performed.
– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at Zone2 or

– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source

Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multichannel playback in another room

– Changing the sound mode or audio settings

(Zone4).

Y
• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to connect the video device to the
unit with an HDMI cable (p.45).
• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.
• The “Setup” menu and “Option” menu cannot be used with Zone2 or Zone4, but browsing or play back are
possible with a network, USB or Bluetooth connection in Zone2.

HDMI OUT 3
(ZONE OUT) jack

The unit (rear)

(Example: using a TV)
HDMI input

HDMI OUT
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

HDMI OUT

AV 7

(HDCP2.2)

HDMI

(HDCP2.2)

NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)

3
(ZONE OUT)

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

TRIGGER
OUT
1

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

RS-232C

OUT

(FRONT)

PRE OUT
R

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SPEAKERS
R SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

CENTER

FRONT

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

Zone2 or Zone4
(Example: using an AV amplifier)
HDMI input
HDMI
HDMI

Main zone

Zone4

To assign the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign”
(p.145) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”.

112

■ Operating the unit from another room
(remote connection)

An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support

You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 using the supplied

remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting

remote control if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT

the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver.

Remote connections between Yamaha products

jacks.

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

AV 2

VIE)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

(1 MOVIE)

(5 STB)

(6 GAME)

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

HDMI OUT

AV 7

(5 STB)

AV 3

(6 GAME)

AV 4

TRIGGER
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)

OUT

(FRONT)

PRE OUT
R

Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)

ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

(REAR)
SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SPEAKERS
R

SURROUND

R SURROUND BACK

EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE

CENTER

ANTENNA
(2 RADIO)

OUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

5ȍ

OUT

Infrared signal
receiver

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

(5 STB)

6 OPTICAL

5 COAXIAL

REMOTE

(ZONE OUT)

B AV 2

AXIAL

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

(HDCP2.2)

1
ARC

REMOTE

Remote control
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE

Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
Infrared signal
transmitter

Infrared signal
receiver

External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control

Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
Main zone

113

Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
MAIN/ZONE
MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE
ZON

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

SCENE

1
2

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the corresponding

Press z (receiver power).

pages.

Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled or

disabled.

NET

PRESET
RED

GREEN

indicator lights up in the front display.

BLUETOOTH

USB

YELLOW

BLUE

Use the input selection keys to select an input source.

connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see

• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each
zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected
for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to
AI

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.97)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.105)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.108)

“SERVER”.

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

Russia models only) (p.92)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.101)

“Multi-zone output” (p.184).

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.96)

• Audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you

HOME

• Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
Russia models only) (p.86)

TOP
MENU

• Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models) (p.83)

When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding zone
Input selection keys

TUNER

Start playback on the external device or select a radio
station.

Use the ZONE switch to select a zone.

INPUT

AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in

VOLUME

the main zone.

ENHANCER

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

• The Zone2/Zone3 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input
TUNING

BAND

TUNING

source selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the
Zone3/Zone3 input.
• To play back DSD audio or signals with a sampling frequency of 352.8 kHz or
384 kHz in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input, or use the party
mode (p.115).
• Depending on the “Remote Key” (p.154) setting in the “System” menu, the
PROGRAM key may be also available in Zone2.

Caution
To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4.

114

SLEEP

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

PARTY

SCENE

BLUETOOTH

USB

PRESET
RED

GREEN

The following functions are also available when the zone you want to

The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same music that

operate is enabled.

is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo

Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)

when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house

Press VOLUME or MUTE.

party.

Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)

INPUT
NET

■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)

playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function

SCENE

TUNER

■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or
Zone4

YELLOW

BLUE

Press PARTY.

Press SCENE 1-8.

Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off.

When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front

To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene, hold

display.

down the desired SCENE1-8 key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display.
(Only an input source can be registered for Zone4.)

X
You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode Set” (p.152)

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

Setting the sleep timer

in the “Setup” menu.

Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,

off).

Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main zone.

Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)

ENHANCER

Press ENHANCER.
MUTE

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

ENHANCER
TUNING

BAND

TUNING

X
Depending on the “Remote Key” (p.154) setting, the PROGRAM Key may be also
available in Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.

115

Registering favorite items (shortcut)
You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

HDMI OUT

shortcut numbers.
SCENE

Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.

X
• You can also use the “Favorites” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.107).

INPUT
TUNER

NET

BLUETOOTH

USB

GREEN

• Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual
NET
USB
BLUETOOTH
PRESET

PRESET
RED

Recalling a registered item

input source as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the

PURE DIRECT

YELLOW

BLUE

contents cannot be registered.

1
2

Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET.
Press PRESET to select a desired content.

Recall Preset
01:USB

Registering an item
Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Y
• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.

TOP
MENU

HOME

1
2

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

Memory Preset
01:Empty

VOLUME

– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service.

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

MEMORY

– A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or

To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use PRESET

TUNING

– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS, the unit

STRAIGHT

BAND

– The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the
network.

Shortcut number (flashes)

ENHANCER

TUNING

– The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to the
unit.

Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds.

• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.

deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not recall the music file
correctly. In such cases, register the items again.

keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2.

• The registered content (songs and Internet radio stations) can be displayed as a list

Memory Preset
02:Empty

and easily recalled by using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.73) on your mobile device.
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered

To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.

116

Viewing the current status

Currently input
source

You can view the current status (input or DSP program currently selected) on the front panel

AV 1-7

display or TV.

AUX
AUDIO 1-4*1

Item

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*2)

PHONO

Switching information on the front display

(AM radio feature is not available on the Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
Russia models)
TUNER (FM/AM)

Press INFO on the front panel to select between the various display items.

Info
Audio Decoder

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*2)
* (U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data
System broadcasting station (p.95).

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

TUNER (DAB)

(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only)
See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.89) for details.

Item name
Bluetooth

About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding information appears.

AV1
†‡ Dsur

USB
SERVER

VOL.

AirPlay

L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Information

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*2), IP Address (IP address), Ethernet
MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi MAC address)

NET RADIO

Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program
(sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*2), IP Address (IP address),
Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi MAC address)

MusicCast Link

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*2), IP Address
(IP address), Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi MAC address)

X
Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*2)

to each input source group.
*1

AUDIO 4: RX-A3080 only

*2 The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is

activated, “Decoder Off” appears.

117

Viewing the status information on the TV

1
2

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

PURE DIRECT

HDMI OUT

SCENE

Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “On-screen Information”

and press ENTER.

The following information is displayed on the TV.

TUNER

NET

INPUT

When SURROUND:AI is enabled, the status information for SURROUND:AI is also

BLUETOOTH

USB

displayed.

PRESET
RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

Input source/
CINEMA DSP/
Party mode status ENHANCER status

Volume/YPAO
Volume status

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

RETURN

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

PROGRAM

ENHANCER

Audio format

Decoder

Sound mode

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

BAND

TUNING

To close the information display, press RETURN.

Y
• You can use the PROGRAM key on the remote control for displaying the status
information on the TV. For details, see “PROGRAM Key” (p.154).
• Use the left/right cursor keys to display other informations in the “Setup”
menu on the TV.

118

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is

Option menu items

available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings

during playback.

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

Press OPTION.

• When the input icon is displayed on the upper right of the “Option” menu, the setting is applied to the currently
selected input source. Otherwise, the setting is applied to all of the input sources.

Front display

Option
Tone Control

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
• Default settings are underlined.

VOL.
L C R
SL SW1 SW
SR
SBL
SBR

Item

TV screen

YPAO Volume
(YPAO Volume)

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

Dialogue
(Dialog)

X
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

3
4

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Enhancer
(Enhancer)

Volume Trim
(Volume Trim)

YPAO Volume
(YPAO Vol.)

Enables/disables YPAO Volume.

120

Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is
adjusted.

121

Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds.

121

DTS Dialogue
Control
(DTS Dialog)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X
contents.

121

Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds.

121

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.

121

Enhancer
(Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

122

Hi-Res Mode
(HiRes Mode)

Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for
enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital audio).

122

Input Trim
(In. Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources.

122

Subwoofer Trim
(SW. Trim)

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.

122

Enables/disables Extra Bass.

122

Selects the audio signal to be played back.

123

Extra Bass
(Extra Bass)
Audio Select
(Audio Select)
En

119

Page
120

Lipsync
(Lipsync)

Use the cursor keys to select a setting.

Function
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and
low-frequency range individually.

Tone Control
(Tone Control)

Audio Select
(A.Sel)

Item
Video Mode
(V.M)
Video Processing
(Video Process.)

Function
Enables/disables the video signal processing settings
configured in the “Setup” menu.
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets.

Video Out
(V. Out)

Selects a video to be output with the selected audio
source.

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

Configure the shuffle setting for playback.

Repeat
(Repeat)

Configure the repeat setting for playback.

FM Mode
(Mode)

Switches between the reception settings for FM radio.

124

FM Auto Preset
(FM Auto Preset)

Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong
signals as presets.

124

Clear Preset
(Clear Preset)

Clears radio stations registered to preset numbers.

124

Clear All Preset
(ClearAllPreset)

Clears all the radio stations registered to preset
numbers.

124

Add to favorites
(Add to Fav.)

Adds your favorite Internet radio station to
the“Favorites” folder.

124

Remove from favorites
(RemovefromFav.)

Removes it from the “Favorites” folder.

124

(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models
only)

Shuffle / Repeat
(Shuffle/Repeat)

FM Mode
(FM Mode)

Preset
(Preset)

Init Scan
(Init Scan)

Tune AID
(Tune AID)
On-screen Information
(On-screen Info)

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) individually.

123

Video
Adjustment
(Video Adjust)

Video Out
(Video Out)

■ Tone Control (Tone Control)

Page

Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)

123

Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments
123

Y
• When both “Treble” and “Bass” are 0.0 dB, “Bypass” appears.

• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.

■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.

YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency
levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
sounds even at low volume.
Settings

Enables YPAO Volume.

• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “YPAO” have been already saved (p.55).
• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower volumes or at
night.

Checks reception strength of each DAB channel label.
Displays the current status information.

Disables YPAO Volume.

On (On)

Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception.
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models
only)

Off (Off)

124

120

Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)

Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from
below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting.

the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low
volume at night.

Settings

This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.

Off (Off)

The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.

On (On)

Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is enabled.

– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) is selected when front presence speakers are
used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.77) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)

If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high

Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)

volume.

On
Off

Volume: high
Output level

Output level

Volume: low

Ideal position

Input level

Off
Input level

■ Dialogue (Dialog)
■ Lipsync (Lipsync)

Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.

Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)

Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can
turn up its volume by increasing this setting.

X
This setting is available only when “Delay Enable” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Enable” (default).

Setting range
0 to 3

X
This setting is not available when DTS:X content is played back, or when the Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder
is working.

DTS Dialogue Control (DTS Dialog)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X contents.
Setting range
0 to 6

X
This setting is available only when DTS:X content which supports the DTS Dialogue Control feature is played back.

121

■ Enhancer (Enhancer)

■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.

Configures the input settings.

Enhancer (Enhancer)

Input Trim (In.Trim)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.82).

Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences

when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.82).

Settings

Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)

Off (Off)

Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

On (On)

Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default
TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)

■ Extra Bass (Extra Bass)

Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass

Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.

sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the

– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz

subwoofer.

– DSD audio

Settings

Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this function is
set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel
PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.
Settings
Enables the high-resolution mode.
On (On)

(The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio signal
processing condition.)

Off (Off)

Disables the high-resolution mode.

122

Off (Off)

Disables Extra Bass.

On (On)

Enables Extra Bass.

■ Audio Select (Audio Select)

Video Adjustment (Video Adjust)

Selects the audio signal to be played back.

Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in “Adjustment” (p.144)
in the “Setup” menu.

Audio Select (A.Sel)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input

This setting is applied separately to each input source.

source.

Settings
1 to 6

Settings
Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
Auto (Auto)

1. HDMI input

■ Video Out (V.Out)

2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)

Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.

3. Analog input (AUDIO)
Settings
HDMI (HDMI)

Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals are input
through the HDMI jack.

COAX/OPT
(COAX/OPT)

Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are produced when
no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack.

Analog (Analog)

Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when no signals are
input through the AUDIO jacks.

Off (Off)

Does not output video.

AV 1-7 (AV1-7)

Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.

■ Shuffle / Repeat (Shuffle/Repeat)
Configures the Shuffle settings or repeat settings.

■ Video Processing (Video Process.)

Shuffle (Shuffle)

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings configured
Configures the shuffle setting for the USB storage device (p.97) or media server (p.101).

in “Resolution” and “Aspect” (p.143) in the “Setup” menu.

Settings

Configures the video signal processing settings.

Video Mode (V.M)

Off (Off)

Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order.

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments)
settings configured in “Processing” (p.143) in the “Setup” menu.

Repeat (Repeat)

Settings

Configures the repeat setting for the USB storage device (p.97) or media server (p.101).

Direct (Direct)

Disables the video signal processing.

Settings

Processing
(Processing)

Enables the video signal processing.

Off (Off)

Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly.

123

■ FM Mode (FM Mode)

■ Remove from favorites (RemovefromFav.)

Switches between the reception settings for FM radio.

Remove an Internet radio station from the “Favorites” folder.

FM Mode (Mode)

■ Init Scan (Init Scan)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.

Initiate Scan specifies the initial settings in order to receive DAB radio. If this operation is not

Settings

performed, not all DAB-related functions can be used.

Stereo (Stereo)

Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.

Monaural (Monaural)

Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.

■ Tune AID (Tune AID)
From the “Tune Aid” menu , you can check the reception level of each channel.

■ Preset (Preset)

■ On-screen Information (On-screen Info)

Registers radio stations or clears preset stations.

Displays the current status information.

FM Auto Preset (FM Auto Preset)
Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals as presets.

X
• You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets.
• (U.K., Europe, Russia and Middle East models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “FM Auto Preset”.

Clear Preset (Clear Preset)
Clears radio stations registered to preset numbers.

Clear All Preset (ClearAllPreset)
Clears all the radio stations registered to preset numbers.
Settings
Cancel

Cancels the unregistering of a radio station.

Execute

Removes all registered radio stations.

■ Add to favorites (Add to Fav.)
Register the currently playing Internet radio station to the “Favorites” folder.

X
You can also register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth input source as shortcuts (p.116).

124

CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
Perform the following basic procedure to operate the “Setup” menu. You can configure the
unit’s various functions with the “Setup” menu.

X
• If new firmware is available, the message screen appears.
• If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears at the lower of the “Setup” menu.

1
2

Press SETUP.

3
4
5

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting.
Press SETUP.

This completes the settings.

125

Setup menu items
Use the following table to configure various functions of the unit.
Menu

Item

Function

Page

Setting Pattern

Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.

131

Setting Data Copy

Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.

131

Selects a speaker system.

131

Front

Selects the size of the front speakers.

132

Center

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

132

Surround

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size.

133

Surround Back

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size.

133

Front Presence

Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.

133

Rear Presence

Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.

133

Subwoofer

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected.

134

Power Amp Assign

Configuration
Speaker

Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position.

134

Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

134

Parametric EQ

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

134

Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output.

135

YPAO Result

Checks and Reloads the previous YPAO adjustments.

135

126

Item

Lipsync

DSP Parameter

Sound

Surround Decoder

9ch Stereo

136

Enables/disables the “Lipsync” adjustment configured in “Auto/Manual Select” in the “Setup” menu.

136

Auto/Manual Select

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

136

Adjustment

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually.

137

DSP Level

Adjusts the sound field effect level.

137

Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation.

137

Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field.

137

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field.

137

Reverb Time

Adjusts the decay time of the rear reverberant sound.

137

Reverb Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation.

138

Reverb Level

Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound.

138

Surround Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation.

138

Surround Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field.

138

Surround Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field.

138

Surround Back Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation.

138

Surround Back Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field.

138

Surround Back Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field.

139

Decode Type

Selects a surround decoder to be used.

139

Center Spread

Selects whether to spread the center channel signals to left and right when 2-channel source is played.

139

Center Image

Adjusts the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field.

139

Level

Adjusts the entire volume.

139

Front / Rear Balance

Adjusts the front and rear volume balance.

139

Left / Right Balance

Adjusts the left and right volume balance.

139

Height Balance

Adjusts the height volume balance using the presence speakers.

139

Monaural Mix

Enables/disables monaural sound output.

140

Reset

Restores all default settings.

140

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback.

140

Max Volume

Sets the limit value of the volume.

140

Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on.

140

Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode.

140

Pure Direct Mode

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP 3D effect level when the volume is adjusted.

140

VPS

Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers.

141

VSBS

Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.

141

Adaptive DSP Level
Virtual Speaker

Page

Delay Enable

Dynamic Range
Volume

Function
Displays information about the current audio signal.

Information

Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode (RX-A3080 only)

Enables/disables the jitter elimination function.

141

DAC Digital Filter (RX-A3080 only)

Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter).

141

Balance Input Attenuator (RX-A3080 only)

Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input to avoid sound distortion.

141

127

Item

Function

Page

Scene Setting

Selects items to be included as the scene assignments.

142

Scene Rename

Renames the scene name displayed on the front display or TV screen.

142

Information

Displays information about the current video signal and the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.

143

Video Mode

Enables/disables the video signal processing.

143

Resolution

Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals.

143

Aspect

Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals.

143

Adjustment

Configures the video adjustments.

144

HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control.

145

TV Audio Input

Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input.

145

ARC

Enables/disables ARC.

145

Standby Sync

Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit.

145

HDMI Audio Output

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV.

145

HDMI ZONE OUT Assign

Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.

145

HDCP Version

Selects the version of HDCP used on the HDMI input jacks.

146

HDMI Standby Through

Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode.

146

Information

Displays the network information on the unit.

146

Network Connection

Selects the network connection method.

147

IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

147

Network Standby

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices.

147

Scene

Video Mode

Video/HDMI
HDMI Control

Network

MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

148

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow a Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback.

148

AirPlay Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPhone via AirPlay.

148

Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.

149

MusicCast Link Power Interlock

Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (this unit) also turns on the power of other
devices of the network.

149

Bluetooth
Bluetooth

Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions.

149

Disconnect

Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit.

150

Bluetooth Standby

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby).

150

Audio Receive

128

Item

Function
Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4

Information

Page
150

Volume

Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

150

Max Volume

Sets the Zone2 limit value of the volumes.

151

Initial Volume

Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.

151

Audio Delay

Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2.

151

Monaural

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.

151

Enhancer

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone2 output.

151

Tone Control

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and low-frequency range for Zone2 output.

151

Extra Bass

Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 output.

151

Left / Right Balance

Adjusts the volume balance for Zone2 output.

151

Volume

Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone3 output.

150

Max Volume

Sets the Zone3 limit value of the volumes.

151

Initial Volume

Sets the Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.

151

Audio Delay

Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone3.

151

Monaural

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone3 output.

151

Enhancer

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone3 output.

151

Tone Control

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and low-frequency range for Zone3 output.

151

Extra Bass

Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone3 output.

151

Left / Right Balance

Adjusts the volume balance for Zone3 output.

151

Zone Rename

Changes the zone name displayed on the TV screen.

152

Party Mode Set

Enables/disables switching to the party mode.

152

Zone2

Multi Zone

Zone3

129

Item

Function

Page

Information

Displays the system information on the unit.

152

Language

Selects an on-screen menu language.

152

Input Assignment

Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.

153

Input Skip

Sets which input source is skipped when operating the INPUT key.

153

Input Rename

Changes the input source name displayed on the front display.

153

Auto Play

Enables/disables Auto Play function in Internet radio services.

154

DSP Skip

Sets which sound programs are skipped when operating the PROGRAM key.

154

PROGRAM Key

Sets the function for the PROGRAM key on the remote control.

154

Color Key

Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE key of the remote control.

155

Dimmer (Front Display)

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

155

Volume

Switches the scale of the volume display.

155

Short Message

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated.

155

Wallpaper

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV screen.

155

Trigger Mode

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT 1 jack to function.

156

Target Zone

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT 1 jack functions are synchronized.

156

Trigger Mode

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT 2 jack to function.

156

Target Zone

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT 2 jack functions are synchronized.

156

Auto Power Standby

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function.

157

ECO Mode

Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode).

157

Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

157

Firmware Update

Updates the firmware via the network.

158

Remote Key

System
Display Set

Trigger Output1

Trigger Output2

ECO

130

Speaker

■ Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.

Configures the speaker settings manually.
Choices

X
Default settings are underlined.

Pattern1 ▶ 2

Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.

Pattern2 ▶ 1

Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.

■ Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers
(with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply
bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone
configurations to enhance your system.

■ Setting Pattern

Settings

Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.

Basic

When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in the
selected pattern.
7.2 +1Zone

• Measurement results (YPAO)

Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to 9-channel
plus rear presence speakers) (p.21).
Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2
system in the main zone (p.32).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks (default: Zone2).

• Power Amp Assign
• Configuration

7.2.2 +1Zone

Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2.2
system in the main zone (p.32).

• Distance

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone2).

• Level

Select this option when you use Zone2 and Zone3 speakers in addition to the 7.2
system in the main zone (p.32).

7.2 +2Zone

• Parametric EQ
Settings
Pattern1, Pattern2

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 and EXTRA SP 2 jacks
(default: Zone2 for EXTRA SP 1, Zone3 for EXTRA SP 2).
(RX-A3080 only)

7.2.4 [ext.RP]

X
• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the center of the diagram on the right side of the screen.

Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including rear presence channel
expansion using an external amplifier (p.33).
(RX-A3080 only)

• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your

7.2.4 [ext.Front]

listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed, you
can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.

Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including front channel
expansion using an external amplifier (p.34).
(RX-A3080 only)

7.2.4 [ext.FP+RP]

7.2.2 [ext.Front]
+1Zone

Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including front presence and
rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.34).
Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2.2
system (including front channel expansion using an external amplifier) in the
main zone (p.35).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone2).

131

■ Configuration

Select this option when you use Zone2 and Zone3 speakers in addition to the 7.2
system (including front channel expansion using an external amplifier) in the
7.2 [ext.Front] +2Zone main zone (p.35).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 and EXTRA SP 2 jacks
(default: Zone2 for EXTRA SP 1, Zone3 for EXTRA SP 2).
7.2 Bi-Amp
5.2.2 Bi-Amp

7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone

7.2.4 Bi-Amp
[ext.FP+RP]

Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.

X
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or

Select this option when you use the 7.2 system including bi-amp front speakers
(p.36).

larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”) as a guide.
• When the speaker size is set to “Small”, you can configure the “Crossover”. Frequency sounds lower than the

Select this option when you use the 5.2.2 system including bi-amp front speakers
(p.36).

specified value will be output from the subwoofer and higher will be output from the corresponding speakers.

Front

Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2
system (including bi-amp front speakers) in the main zone (p.37).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone2).

Selects the size of the front speakers.

(RX-A3080 only)

Settings

Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including bi-amp front speakers,
and front presence and rear presence channel expansion using an external
amplifier) (p.37).

Large

The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components.
Select this option for small speakers.

(RX-A3080 only)
5.2.4 Bi-Amp [ext.RP]

Select this option for large speakers.

Small

Select this option when you use the 5.2.4 system including bi-amp front speakers
and rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier) (p.38).

The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components lower than
the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).

X
“Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.

Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
Large

Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components.
Select this option for small speakers.

Small

None

132

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

Surround

Front Presence

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes and layout.

Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size and layout.

Settings

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency
components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

None

Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.

Select this option for small speakers.
Small

None

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).

Layout Settings
Front Height

The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP
works when you select a sound program.

Overhead

Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the ceiling.

Dolby Enabled SP

Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front presence
speakers.

Layout Settings
Rear

Front

Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the front side
wall.

Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of the
room.

X
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”.

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of the
room.

• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.26).

Virtual CINEMA FRONT works in this case.

Rear Presence

Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.

This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”.

Settings

Surround Back

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

Settings

None

Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected.

Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
Large

Small

None

Layout Settings

The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel
frequency components.

Rear Height

Select this option when two small speakers are connected.

Overhead

Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed to the ceiling.

Dolby Enabled SP

Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the rear presence
speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency
(default: 80 Hz).

Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed on the rear side wall.

Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.

The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.

This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”.

X
This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to “Front”.

133

■ Level

Subwoofer

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack
and its phase.

Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2

Settings

Normal

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other
channels.

Reverse

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other
channels.

Setting range
-10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Use

None

■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Settings

Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels when both
“Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.

Manual

Left + Right

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right sides of the
room.

Front + Rear

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear sides of the
room.

Monaural x2

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely.

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.

YPAO:Front

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front
speakers.

YPAO:Natural

Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.

Through

Does not use the equalizer.

X
“YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “YPAO”
have already been saved (p.55). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.

X
This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”.

■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from
“Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Setting range
0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments

For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.

YPAO:Flat

When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.

Layout settings

Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.

134

■ Manual equalizer adjustment

■ Test Tone

1
2

Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.

Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker

Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.

balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
Settings

Off

Does not output test tones.

Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or
equalizer.

• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “YPAO” (p.55) to the “Manual” fields for fine
adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.

■ YPAO Result
You can check the previous YPAO adjustments (“Wiring”, “Size”, “Distance”, “Level”, “Angle

Use the cursor keys to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands (4 for subwoofer).

(horizontal)” and “Height”) in “YPAO Result”.
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, you can discard the
manual settings and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments

1
2
3

To fine-adjust the center frequency, Q factor (bandwidth) or gain, use the cursor keys to select
an item.
Freq.: Use the cursor keys to adjust the center frequency of the selected band.
Q: Use the cursor keys to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band.
Gain: Use the cursor keys to adjust the gain of the selected band.
Setting range
Center frequency: 15.6 Hz to 16.0 kHz (15.6 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

135

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload”.
Press ENTER.
Press SETUP.

Sound

■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.

Configures the audio output settings.

Delay Enable

■ Information

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.

Displays information about the current audio signal.

Choices
AV 1-7, AUX, AUDIO 1-4*

Choices
Format

* AUDIO 4: RX-A3080 only

Audio format of the input signal

Settings

The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)

Channel

For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels,
2 surround channels, and LFE).

Disable

Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Enable

Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Input

Output

Auto/Manual Select

(When DTS:X content is played back)
For example, “7.1.4” denotes “standard 7.1-channel plus 4 for
overhead speaker channels”.

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

Sampling

The number of samples per second of the input digital signal

Setting range

Dialogue

The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal

Channel

The number of signal output channels (for example, “5.1.2”
denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead speaker
channels”) and the speaker terminals from which signals are
output

Auto

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that
supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio
output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the

specifications and settings of the playback device.

Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV
connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.

136

Adjustment

Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation.

to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to

Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.

“Auto”.

Setting range
1 ms to 99 ms

Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field.
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

Setting range
0.1 to 2.0 (higher to enhance the broadening effect)

• When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and

• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

fine adjustment.

• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

• This setting is also available in “Lipsync” (p.121) in the “Option” menu.

Liveness

■ DSP Parameter

Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field.

Selects the sound program to change the settings of the sound program.
Setting range
0 to 10 (higher to enhance the reflectivity)

DSP Level

Adjusts the sound field effect level. Higher to enhance the sound field effect, and lower to

• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

reduce it.

• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Setting range
-6 dB to +3 dB

Reverb Time

Adjusts the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. Higher to enrich the reverberant sound

• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

and lower to have clear sound.

• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Setting range
1.0 s to 5.0 s

Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

137

Reverb Delay

Surround Room Size

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. Higher to

Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field.

enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.

Setting range
0.1 to 2.0 (higher to enhance the broadening effect)

Setting range
0 ms to 250 ms

• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Surround Liveness
Reverb Level

Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field.

Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. Higher to strengthen the reverberant sound, and

Setting range
0 to 10 (higher to enhance the reflectivity)

lower to weaken it.

Setting range
0 % to 100 %

• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

Surround Back Initial Delay

• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation.

Surround Initial Delay

Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation.

Setting range
1 ms to 49 ms

Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.

Setting range
1 ms to 49 ms

• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

Surround Back Room Size

• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field.
Setting range
0.1 to 2.0 (higher to enhance the broadening effect)

Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

138

■ 9ch Stereo

Surround Back Liveness

Adjusting the volume settings.

Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field.
Setting range
0 to 10 (higher to enhance the reflectivity)

Level

Adjusts the entire volume. This setting is effective when “9ch Stereo” is selected.

• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.

Setting range
-5 to 0 to 5

• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Front / Rear Balance

■ Surround Decoder

Adjusts the front and rear volume balance. Higher to enhance the front side, and lower to

Configures the surround decoders settings.

enhance the rear side. This setting is effective when “9ch Stereo” is selected.

Decode Type

Setting range
-5 to 0 to 5

Selects a surround decoder to be used.

Left / Right Balance

Choices
Auto, bDsur, Neural:X, Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music

Adjusts the left and right volume balance. Higher to enhance the right side, and lower to
enhance the left side. This setting is effective when “9ch Stereo” is selected.

Center Spread

Setting range
-5 to 0 to 5

Selects whether to spread the center channel signals to left and right when a 2channel source
is played. This setting is effective when “bDsur” is selected.

Height Balance

Settings
Off

Disables Center Spread.

Adjusts the height volume balance using the presence speakers. Higher to enhance the upside,

Enables Center Spread.

and lower to enhance the downside. This setting is effective when “9ch Stereo” is selected.
Setting range
0 to 5 to 10

X
If you feel the center sound is too strong, set this function to “On”.

Center Image

The presence speakers do not produce sounds when “Height Balance” is set to “0”.

Adjusts the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field. Adjust this higher to
strengthen the center localization (less broadening effect) or lower to weaken it (more
broadening effect).This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music” is selected.
Setting range
0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0

139

■ Volume

Monaural Mix

Setting the volume.

Enables/disables monaural sound output. This setting is effective when “9ch Stereo” is
selected.

Max Volume

Settings
Off

Disables monaural sound output.

Enables monaural sound output.

Sets the limit value of the volume.
Setting range
-60.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB [20.5 to 95.5 (5.0 increments), 97.0]

Reset

Initial Volume

Restores all default settings.

Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings

■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS
signals) playback.

Off

Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments)
[0.5 to 97.0 (0.5 increments)].
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)

Settings
Maximum

Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard

Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

■ Pure Direct Mode

Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes.

Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.82).

When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically
adjusted based on the input signal information.

Settings

Minimum/Auto

Auto

Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the selected
input source or an input source that can be operated with the on-screen display is
selected. When no video signals are input, the wall paper is displayed.

Video Off

Does not output video signals including the wall paper.

■ Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
Settings

140

Off

Does not adjust the effect level automatically.

Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO measurement results
and the volume level.

■ Virtual Speaker

Settings
Off

Setting Virtual Speaker.

Disables the jitter elimination function.
Enables the jitter elimination function.

VPS

Level 1, Level 2, Level 3

Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround

The higher level enhances the DAC accuracy, but may cause audio interruptions
on some playback devices depending on the audio clock conditions. In this case,
select lower level.

speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front presence speakers are
connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence speakers are connected but no rear

■ DAC Digital Filter

presence speakers (p.77).

(RX-A3080 only)
Settings

Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter) to have favorite

Off

Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).

Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).

sounds.
Settings

Sharp Roll-off Type

Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set “Virtual
Presence Speaker” to “Off”.

Slow Roll-off Type

VSBS
Short Latency Type

Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.

Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with steep attenuation characteristics.
It has a tendency to produce clear sounds.
Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with gentle attenuation characteristics.
It has a tendency to produce soft sounds.
Reduces the audio delay caused by the DAC internal digital filter.
It has a tendency to produce responsive and rhythmical sounds.

When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back speakers are connected.

■ Balance Input Attenuator

Settings
Off

Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).

(RX-A3080 only)

Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).

Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input (AUDIO 4) so that you can
avoid sound distortion when high-level signals are input.

Activate the attenuator when connecting an audio device which outputs signals of 3 V (RMS) or

VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.

higher to the AUDIO 4 (XLR balanced input) jacks (p.47).

■ Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode

Input source
AUDIO 4

(RX-A3080 only)
Settings

Enables/disables the jitter elimination function.
Input source
AV 1-7, AUDIO 1-4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned), (network sources),
Bluetooth, USB

141

Bypass

Does not activate the attenuator for the balance input.

ATT.(-6dB)

Activates the attenuator for the balance input to reduce the signal level (-6dB).

Scene
Configures the scene settings.

■ Scene Setting

Video

Video Mode (p.143), Video Adjustment (p.123)

Volume

Master Volume (p.74)

Lipsync

Lipsync (p.121), Delay (p.136)

Speaker Setup

Setting Pattern (p.131), Parametric EQ (p.134)

Zone Interlock

Power (p.114), Input (p.150), Volume (p.150) *1

Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings currently
*1 The “Volume” setting is not available with Zone4.

assigned to the selected scene.

To restore the default settings for the selected scene, select “Reset”.

The scene assignments can include radio stations, or the content on a selected USB storage device, Bluetooth
device, and network device.

■ Scene Rename

■ Procedure

Changes the SCENE name displayed on the front display or on the TV.

Use the cursor keys to select the SCENE name and press ENTER.

To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and press

■ Procedure
ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).

Use the cursor keys to select the SCENE name and press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename.

Choices
HDMI Control

Control Sync (HDMI Control (p.145))

Input

Input (p.74), Audio Select (p.123)

To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

[Input sources: TUNER, (network sources), SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB]
Registerd Content

Station, Music Content

Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

[Input sources: others]

---

To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

HDMI Output

HDMI Output (p.74)

Mode

DSP Program (p.78), Pure Direct Mode (p.140), Enhancer (p.151), Hi-Res Mode
(p.122), SURROUND:AI (p.77)

Sound

Tone Control (p.120), YPAO Volume (p.120), Adaptive DRC (p.121),
Extra Bass (p.122)

Surround

Dialogue Lift (p.121), Dialogue Level (p.121), Subwoofer Trim (p.122)

142

To exit from the menu, Press SETUP.

Video/HDMI

Resolution
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.

Configures the video/HDMI settings.

Settings

■ Information

Through

Does not convert the resolution.

Displays information about the current video signal and the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT

Auto

Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.

jacks.

480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K

Output video signals with a selected resolution.

Choices
HDMI Signal

Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output

HDMI Resolution

Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)

HDMI Monitor
Video Resolution

Resolutions supported by the TV

(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)

X
If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.160) in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV
normally.)

Aspect
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.
Settings
Through

Does not convert the aspect ratio.

16:9 Normal

Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the
screen.

X
■ Video Mode

This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p
(4K) signals.

Configures the video signal processing settings.

Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments).
Settings
Direct
Processing

Disables the video signal processing.
Enables the video signal processing.
Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”.

X
When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce
video output delay.

143

Adjustment

Contrast
Adjusts the video contrast.

Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You can register
the video adjustments as presets (up to 6).

Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100

X
The video adjustments work on the video signals with 1080p or lower resolution.

Saturation

■ Setup procedure

Adjusts the video saturation.

1
2

Use the ENTER to select a preset number.

Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100

Use the cursor keys to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys to select an item.

Detail Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details.
Setting range
0 to 50

Edge Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges.
Setting range
0 to 50

Brightness
Adjusts the video brightness.
Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100

144

■ HDMI Control

Standby Sync

Configures the HDMI control settings.

Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when
“HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

HDMI Control

Settings

Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.184).
Settings
Off
On

Disables HDMI Control.

Off

Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Auto

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is
receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”.

■ HDMI Audio Output

Selects whether the HDMI sound is output from the TV speakers.

To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.184) after connecting HDMI

Control-compatible devices.

The “HDMI OUT1” setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

TV Audio Input

HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2, HDMI ZONE OUT

Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set
to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack, HDMI OUT 2

switched to its built-in tuner.

jack or HDMI ZONE OUT.

Settings
AUDIO 1-3

Settings

Y
When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an
external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.

Off

Disables the audio output from the TV.

Enables the audio output from the TV.

Y
The HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.

ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.186) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

■ HDMI ZONE OUT Assign

Settings

Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.

Off

Disables ARC.

Enables ARC.

Settings
Zone2, Zone4

For details on audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.184).

You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the
unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use
the TV’s speakers.

145

Network

■ HDCP Version
Selects the HDCP version of the HDMI input jacks for watching 4K video content.

Configures the network settings.
Input sources
AV 1-7

■ Information

Settings

Displays the network information on the unit.
Auto

Automatically sets the version of HDCP according to content.

1.4

Sets the version of HDCP to always be 1.4.

Choices
IP Address

IP address

Subnet Mask

Subnet mask

Default Gateway

The IP address of the default gateway

stand by mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys to

DNS Server (P)

The IP address of the primary DNS server

select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit

DNS Server (S)

The IP address of the secondary DNS server

blinks).

MAC Address
(Ethernet)

MAC address

■ HDMI Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in

Settings

MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
Off

(This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.)
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.

Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Auto

Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is set to the
power saving mode.

Network Name

Network name (the unit’s name on the network)

MusicCast Network

The status of the MusicCast network connection.

Wired/Wireless (Wi-Fi)

The status of the wired or wireless connection

SSID

146

(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
The SSID of the wireless network

■ Network Connection

Use the cursor keys to select a parameter type and press ENTER.

Selects the network connection method.
IP Address
Settings
Wired

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a
commercially-available network cable (p.51).

Wireless (Wi-Fi)

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless
router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a
wireless network” (p.68).

■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

DHCP

Specifies an IP address.

Subnet Mask

Specifies a subnet mask.

Default Gateway

Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P)

Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S)

Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

Use the cursor keys to move the edit position and to select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Select whether to use a DHCP server.

■ Network Standby

Settings

Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby).

Off

Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For
details, see “Manual network settings”.

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such
as IP address).

Settings
Off
On

IP Address

Disables the network standby function.
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Enables the network standby function.

Set the network parameters (such as IP address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway)
Auto

manually.

(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power saving
mode when the network cable is disconnected.)

■ Manual network settings

Set “DHCP” to “Off”.

Use the cursor keys to select “IP Address” and press ENTER.

With an advanced energy saving design, this product achieves a low power consumption of not
more than two watts when in Network Standby mode.

147

■ MAC Address Filter

■ DMC Control

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

Selects whether to allow a Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. A Digital Media
Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When

Filter

this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows
Media Player 12) on the same network.

Enables/disables the MAC address filter.

Input source
SERVER

Settings
Off

Disables the MAC address filter.

Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1-10”, specify the MAC addresses
of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit.

Settings

X
AirPlay (p.108) and DMC (p.148) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.

Disable

Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

Enable

Allows DMCs to control playback.

■ AirPlay Volume Interlock

MAC Address 1-10

Enables/disables volume control from iTunes/iPhone via AirPlay. When other than “Off” is set,
you can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPhone during playback.

Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to
the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.

Interlock

■ Procedure
Settings

Use the cursor keys to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to move the edit position and to select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

Off
Limited

Full

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

148

Disables volume control from iTunes/iPhone
Enables volume control from iTunes/iPhone within the limited range
(-80 dB to -20 dB and mute).
Enables volume control from iTunes/iPhone in the full range
(-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute).

Bluetooth

■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.

Configures the Bluetooth settings.

Network Name
■ Setup procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename .

■ Bluetooth
Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.96).
Settings

X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

■ MusicCast Link Power Interlock
Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (the unit)
also turns on the power of other devices of the network.
Settings
Off

Disables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).

Enables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).

149

Off

Disables the Bluetooth function.

Enables the Bluetooth function.

Multi Zone

■ Audio Receive
Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio receiver.

Configures the multi zone settings.

Disconnect

■ Information

Terminates the Bluetooth connection between a Bluetooth device (such as a smartphone) and

Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.

the unit.

Choices

■ Procedure

Select “Disconnect” and press ENTER to terminate the Bluetooth connection.

X
This setting is not available when no Bluetooth devices are connected.

On/Off

Displays the status of each zone.

Input

The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.

Volume

The volume setting for Zone2 and Zone3.

Tone Control

The tone control setting (the level of Treble and Bass) for Zone2 and Zone3.

Bluetooth Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices
(Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns on when a
connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device.
Settings
Off
On

Disables the Bluetooth standby function.
Enables the Bluetooth standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

■ Zone2, Zone3 Set

Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings.

This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.147) is set to “Off”.

Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable the volume
adjustment for the corresponding zone.
Settings
Fixed

Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Variable

Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

X
This setting is not available depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.131).

150

Max Volume

Enhancer

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 limit value of the volumes.

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.82) for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Setting range
-60.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB [20.5 to 95.5 (5.0 increments), 97.0]

Settings

Off

Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

Tone Control

Initial Volume

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) for Zone2 or

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.

Zone3 output.

Settings
Settings
Off

Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments) [0.5 to
97.0 (0.5 increments)].
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)

X
This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

Auto

Adjusts the levels of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range
(Bass) automatically in synchronization with the main volume, with correction for
the auditory response of the human ear.

Manual

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass)
manually (-6.0 to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments).

Bypass

Does not adjust the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency
range (Bass).

Audio Delay
Extra Bass

Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3 so that the audio is synchronized with the

Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 or Zone3 output. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can

video.

enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of speakers.

Setting range
0 ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments)

Settings

Monaural

Off

Disables Extra Bass.

Enables Extra Bass.

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Left / Right Balance

Settings
Off

Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.

Adjusts the front speaker balance for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.

Setting range
-20 to 0 to +20 (negative to the left and positive to the right)

151

System

■ Zone Rename
Changes the zone name displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Configures the system settings.
■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys to select Zone, and then press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename.

■ Information
Displays the system information on the unit.
Choices
Remote ID

The unit’s remote control ID setting

TV Format

The unit’s video signal type

Speaker Impedance

The speaker impedance setting of the unit

(Asia and General models only)
Tuner Frequency Step
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit

System ID

System ID number

Firmware Version

The version of firmware installed on the unit

To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

■ Language

Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

Select an on-screen menu language.

X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

■ Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.115) for each zone.
Choice
Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4

Settings
English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian, Chinese

Settings
Disable

Disables switching to the party mode.

Enable

Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by
pressing PARTY on the remote control.

X
The information on the front display is provided in English only.

X
When party mode is being used, the Disable/Enable setting cannot be changed.

152

■ Input Assignment

■ Input Skip

Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.

Set which input sources are skipped when operating the INPUT key or AV CONTROLLER. You
can select the desired input source quickly by using this function.

Input Assignment

X
When using AV CONTROLLER, you cannot select the input sources set to “On” in this function.

■ Procedure
Example: assigning the OPTICAL (2) jack to the input source “AV 2”

Input sources
AV 1-7, AUX, AUDIO 1-4*, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB

Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “OPTICAL”, and press
ENTER.

* AUDIO 4: RX-A3080 only
Settings
Off

Does not skip the selected input source.

Skips the selected input source.

■ Input Rename (Auto)
Automatically changes the input source names displayed on the front display.You can select a
name created by the Auto Rename function.

Use the cursor keys to select “2” and press ENTER.

Input sources
AV 1-7, AUDIO 1-3

■ Procedure

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys to select an input source to be renamed.

Use the cursor keys to select “Auto”.

To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 2.

Press SETUP.

You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.

• When “Auto” is selected, the created name is saved even after the external device is disconnected. To reset to
the default setting, switch the setting to “Manual” and then back to “Auto”.
• “Auto” can be selected for AUDIO 1-3 only if a digital “Input Assignment” setting is selected.

153

■ Input Rename (Manual)

■ DSP Skip

Allows the input source names displayed on the front display to be set manually.

Set which sound programs are skipped when operating the PROGRAM key.You can select the
desired sound program quickly by using this function.

Input sources
AV 1-7, AUX, AUDIO 1-4*, PHONO, TUNER, MusicCast Link, SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB

Settings

* AUDIO 4: RX-A3080 only

■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys to select an input source to be renamed.

Press ENTER.

Does not skip the selected sound program.

Skips the selected sound program.

■ Remote Key
Configures the Remote Key settings.

The cursor moves to the name edit screen.

Off

PROGRAM Key

Use the cursor keys and ENTER key to edit the name, and then select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

Sets the function that is assigned to the PROGRAM key on the remote control. You can use the

• To cancel the entry, select “CLEAR”.

PROGRAM key for other than DSP program selection.

• If you select “RESET”, the default input name will be inserted into the editing area.

Settings

To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 3.

Press SETUP.

Assign 1

Enables selecting the DSP Programs.
Enables selecting just the DSP Movie/Music Programs.

Assign 2

The up key of the PROGRAM keys: toggle between the Movie Programs.
The down key of the PROGRAM keys: toggle between the Music Programs

■ Auto Play

Assign 3

Enables/disables Auto Play function in Internet streaming services and following input

Assign 4

Enables moving to the previous/next page of the Browse Screen.

sources.

Assign 5

Enables fine-adjusting the subwoofer volume.

Input sources
(network sources), SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB

Assign 6

Settings

Assign 7

Off

Disables Auto Play function.

Starts automatically to play back the last content which you played back.

Auto

Starts automatically to play back the content which only you played back at
setting the unit to standby mode.

Enables selecting the NETWORK sources.

Enables adjusting the volume of dialogue sounds.
Enables selecting shuffle/repeat settings.
The up key of the PROGRAM keys: repeat
The down key of the PROGRAM keys: shuffle
Displays the front/on-screen display information.

Assign 8

The up key of the PROGRAM keys: front display information
The down key of the PROGRAM keys: on-screen display information

This setting does not change the function of the PROGRAM key on the front panel.

In some input sources or content, you might not enable Auto Play function.

X
With some input sources, “Auto” cannot be selected.

154

Color Key

Volume

Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote control.

Switches the scale of the volume display.

Settings

Default

Assigns the functions of devices connected to the unit with an HDMI cable.

Displays the volume in the “dB” unit.

This setting is effective when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

0-97

Displays the volume in the numeric value (0 to 97).

Assigns the functions of TV Control to each key.
RED: EXIT (closes the menu on the TV)
TV Control

Short Message

GREEN: INFO (displays information about the TV such as the resolution)
YELLOW: BROADCAST (switches the TV broadcast type)

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as

BLUE: INPUT (switches the TV input)

input selection and volume adjustment).

This setting is effective when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

Displays short messages on the TV screen.

• For details on “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu, see “HDMI Control” (p.145)

Off

Does not display short messages on the TV screen.

• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup after connecting HDMI Control
compatible devices (p.184).

Wallpaper

• HDMI Control might not work properly.

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.

■ Display Set

Settings

Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.

Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)

Y
The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.157) is set to “On”.

155

Piano

Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video signal.

Gray

Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal.

■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2

Target Zone

Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

switching.

Settings

Trigger Mode
Main

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Settings
Power

Source

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone
specified with “Target Zone”.

Zone2

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone
specified with “Target Zone”.
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source.”

Manual

Zone3

Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission
with “Manual”.

Source

Zone4

Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when
“Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
AV 1-7, AUX, AUDIO 1-4*, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB

All

* AUDIO 4: RX-A3080 only

Settings
Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.

High

Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in
this option.

Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is
set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device
connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Choices
Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission.

High

Transmits the electronic signal.

156

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with power status of Zone3.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with input switching in Zone3.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with power status of Zone4.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with input switching in Zone4.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of any zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in any zone.

■ ECO

ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.

Configures the power supply settings.

You can reduce the unit’s power consumption by setting “ECO Mode” to “On”. After setting, be
sure to press ENTER to restart the unit.
Settings
Off

Disables the eco mode.

Enables the eco mode.

Y
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.

Auto Power Standby

• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if no
input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby

■ Memory Guard

mode.

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

Settings

Memory Guard

Off

Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.

5 minutes, 20 minutes

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and the unit
has not detected any input signal for the specified time.

2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the
specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit will switch to
standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.

Settings
Off

Does not protect the settings.

Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.

X
When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.

Default
U.K., Europe and Russia models: 20 minutes
Other models: Off

X
Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front
display.

Icon

157

Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)

■ Firmware Update
Displays information about the firmware update.

Firmware Update

Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.

Updates the firmware via the network. You can also check the firmware version and system ID.

1
2

Choices
Firmware Version

Displays the version of the firmware installed on the unit.

System ID

Displays the system ID number.

Set the unit to standby mode.
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z

STRAIGHT

X
• Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If the Internet connection speed is slow, or the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may
not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, wait a while before
updating the firmware again, or update the firmware using the USB memory device. For details on using the

PROGRAM

USB memory device, see “Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE)” (p.162).

3
4
5

USB Update
Perform a firmware update using a USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu.

X
For information about updating the firmware using a USB memory device, see “Updating the firmware (FIRM.
UPDATE)” (p.162) in “Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)”.

Press PROGRAM to select an item.
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.

The new settings take effect.

158

ADVANCED SETUP menu items

Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)

X
Default settings are underlined.

Item

Function

SPEAKER IMP.

Changes the speaker impedance setting.

159

REMOTE SENSOR

Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit.

159

REMOTE ID

Selects the unit’s remote control ID.

159

TUNER FRQ STEP

(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.

REMOTE SENSOR
ON

Page

Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor is
turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
Settings

160

TV FORMAT

Switches the video signal type.

160

MONITOR CHECK

Removes the limitation on HDMI video output.

160

4K MODE

Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format.

161

DTS MODE

Switches the DTS format notification setting.

161

BACKUP/RESTORE

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from
the backup.

161

INITIALIZE

Restores the default settings.

162

FIRM. UPDATE

Updates the firmware.

162

VERSION

Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

162

Turns on the remote control sensor.

OFF

Turns off the remote control sensor.

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
REMOTE ID

ID1

Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1).
When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique
remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1, ID2

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.)

■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control

SPEAKER¡IMP.
8¬MIN

To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE1 together for 5 seconds.
To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE2 together for 5 seconds.

Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers

connected.

If the remote control ID does not match that of the unit, “RemID Mismatch” appears on the unit’s front
display when the remote control is operated.

Settings
6 Ω MIN

Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use
4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

8 Ω MIN

Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit.

159

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
(TUNER FRQ STEP)

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)

(Brazil, Asia and General models only)

MONITOR CHECK
YES

TUNER FRQ STEP
FM50/AM9

The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.143)

Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region.

when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different

Settings

resolution than the detected resolution.

FM100/AM10

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by
10-kHz steps.

FM50/AM9

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by
9-kHz steps.

Settings

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)

YES

Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution
supported by the TV only.)

SKIP

Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified
resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)

Y
Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after

TV FORMAT
NTSC

“MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.

Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea, Brazil and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL

160

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)

Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS MODE)
DTS MODE
MODE 1

4K MODE
MODE 1
Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K compatible TV and

Switches the DTS format notification setting.

playback device are connected to the unit.

This setting informs the video device (such as BD/DVD player) about the DTS formats that the

Settings

unit supports.
Settings

Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below.
MODE 1

MODE 2

Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed
correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.

This mode conforms to the DTS:X standard.

MODE 1

Use this setting under normal circumstances.

Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below.

Use this setting if the video device (such as BD/DVD player) fails to properly output
a DTS signal even when it is playing back DTS-HD or DTS:X content.

MODE 2
Format
MODE 1
8 bit
RGB 4:4:4

YCbCr 4:4:4

4K/60, 50 Hz

4K/30, 25, 24 Hz

10 bit

MODE 2
12 bit

8 bit

10 bit

Backing up/recovering the settings (BACKUP/RESTORE)

12 bit

BACKUP/RESTORE
BACKUP

YCbCr 4:2:2

YCbCr 4:2:0

Backups and restores all the unit's setting to a USB memory device. Prepare a USB memory

RGB 4:4:4

device using FAT16 or FAT32 format in advance.

YCbCr 4:4:4

Choices

YCbCr 4:2:2

BACKUP

Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the USB memory device.

RESTORE

Restores the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when backup has
been created).

When “MODE 1” is selected, use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable or Premium High Speed Cable with Ethernet.

■ Backup/rstore procedure

Connect the USB memory device to the USB jack on the front panel.

To start the process, press STRAIGHT to select “BACKUP” or “RESTORE” and then press INFO
on the front panel.

Press INFO again after the confirmation message appears on the front display.

X
To cancel the operation, press STRAIGHT.

161

Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE)

When “Please Power Off!” appears on the front display, press z (power) to set the unit to
standby mode and turn it on again.

FIRM. UPDATE
USB

If “Failed” appears on the front display, check the following and start the process again.

In case of “BACKUP”:

New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as

• You cannot overwrite save. When you save the settings repeatedly, please move the file in

needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the

different folder.

Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information

• The file is stored by the name of “MC_backup_(model name).dat” in the root of the USB

supplied with updates.

memory device.
■ Firmware update procedure

In case of “RESTORE”:

Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the
information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

• Check that the file is stored in the route of the USB memory device.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware
update.

• “RESTORE” is effective after backuping all the settings.
• Do not turn off the unit during the backuping and restoring process. Otherwise, the settings may not be

Choices

restored correctly.
• The user information (such as account, password) is not saved.

USB

Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK

Update the firmware via the network.

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)

If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after SETUP is
pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s

INITIALIZE
CANCEL

firmware via the network” (p.163).

Restores the default settings for the unit.

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)

Choices
VIDEO

Restores the default settings for video configurations.

ALL

Restores the default settings for the unit.

CANCEL

Does not perform an initialization.

VERSION

x.xx

Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

X
• You can also check the firmware version in “Information” (p.143) in the “System” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.

162

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
New firmware that provides additional features or product

MAIN 2 3 4

SLEEP
PARTY
T

ZONE

HDMI OUT

Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it.
SCENE

Note
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable
during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).

INPUT
TUNER

NET

• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.162).

BLUETOOTH

USB

PRESET
RED

Updating the unit’s firmware

improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the

PURE DIRECT

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

SETUP

1
2

Read the on-screen description.
Use the cursor keys to select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off and the firmware update begins.

If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on
the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel.

• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.

The firmware update is complete.
Cursor keys
ENTER

X
• The firmware update indicator (p.15) on the front display lights up when a firmware
update is available via the network.

TOP
MENU

HOME

POP-UP
//MENU
MENU

RETURN

PROGRAM SUR. DECODE

VOLUME

ENHANCER

SETUP” menu (p.162).

• You might not get the message or the lighting up firmware update indicator on the
front display depending on the condition of the network connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.162).

A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after

• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.

SETUP is pressed.

• To perform the update when turning off the unit, select “LATER” in step 2, and then
follow the on-screen instructions. When a screen to confirm the firmware update

STRAIGHT
MEMORY

TUNING

• If you want to cancel without doing anything now, select “CLOSE”.
• Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more.

• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED

• You can also start the firmware update by pressing INFO on the front panel.

BAND

appears after turning off the unit, press ENTER to start the firmware update.
When the firmware update is complete, the unit enters standby mode automatically.

TUNING

• To perform the update when turning off the unit, refer to the following instructions.
– The firmware update can be started by pressing INFO on the front panel.
– The unit turns off automatically without performing the firmware update if two
minutes pass after the screen to confirm the firmware update is displayed.
– To cancel the firmware update process, press RETURN, and the unit will turn off.
– The unit turns off without performing the firmware update if you turn off the unit
with AV CONTROLLER or MusicCast CONTROLLER.

163

APPENDIX
Additional Features
The following features were added for product improvements.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Setup” → “Bluetooth” → “Audio
Send”, and then set “Transmitter” to “On”.

Playing back audio from the unit on Bluetooth®-enabled
speakers/headphones

Select “Device Search” to search the Bluetooth devices.
The list of available Bluetooth devices is displayed.

You can output audio played back from the unit on connected Bluetooth speakers or
headphones.

Select the Bluetooth speakers/headphones to be connected with the unit.

Y
If the desired Bluetooth device is not displayed on the list, set the Bluetooth device to the pairing mode
and then select “Device Search”.

When the connection process finishes, Bluetooth indicator lights up in the front display.
The unit

Bluetooth speakers/headphones

• A Bluetooth device with the pass key other than “0000” cannot be connected to the unit.
• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically connects to the Bluetooth
device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth

Notice

connection.

Audio transmitted via Bluetooth may be delayed. In addition, sound field effects selected on the unit are
not applied.

• Terminate a Bluetooth connection with any of the following operations.
– Terminate the connection from the Bluetooth device.

Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection between Bluetooth

– Set “Transmitter” in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.
• For details on compatible Bluetooth devices, refer to the manual for this unit.

speakers/headphones and the unit.

Notice

Use the input selection keys on the remote control to select an input source.

• The following audio cannot be transmitted.

Select an input source other than Bluetooth.

– AirPlay and DSD audio

The audio transmission function does not work when Bluetooth is selected as the input

– PCM audio exceeding 192 kHz

source.

– Super Audio CD (SACD) and DVD-Audio
– Audio from radio and external devices connected to this unit, playing back with Pure Direct or Direct
enabled

Press SETUP on the remote control to display the menu.

• When connected to a Bluetooth device that does not support copyright protection technology
(SCMS-T), some content may not be played back.
• Played back audio will also be output from speakers connected to the unit.
• Audio from a Bluetooth device (smartphone, etc.) cannot be played back.

164

Bluetooth transmission operations
• Function for transmitting to Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth headphones, etc.)
• Supported profiles
– A2DP, AVRCP
• Supported codecs
– SBC
• Capable of play/stop operation from Bluetooth device (Bluetooth headphones, etc.)

165

Using wireless surround speakers
(MusicCast Surround function)

• In a 5.1.2-channel or 5.1-channel system, the surround speakers and subwoofer can be wireless. With other
systems, only the subwoofer can be wireless.
• With wireless surround speakers

Using devices that support the MusicCast Surround function, you can enjoy a 5.1.2-channel or

– Sound will not be output from the speaker terminals (SURROUND) and pre-out jacks (SURROUND) on the
main unit.

5.1-channel theater system with wireless surround speakers and subwoofer.

– Surround back speakers and rear presence speakers cannot be used.

■ Devices supporting MusicCast Surround

• With a wireless subwoofer
– One subwoofer can be wireless.

As of October 31, 2018
Wireless streaming speakers

– Sound will not be output from the pre-out jacks (SUBWOOFER or SUBWOOFER 1 and 2) on the main unit.
Therefore, another subwoofer cannot be used by connecting it with an audio cable.

Network subwoofer

• The following audio cannot be output from the wireless surround speakers and subwoofer.
– Signals with a sampling frequency of 352.8 kHz or 384kHz
– DSD audio
– DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD (SACD) from HDMI input

1
MusicCast 50

MusicCast 20

MusicCast SUB 100

This unit and the devices supporting MusicCast Surround must be registered
with the same location on the MusicCast CONTROLLER app.

■ Sample speaker layout

Follow the app’s on-screen instructions to complete setup of the MusicCast
Surround function.

For a 5.1.2-channel system using two MusicCast 20 speakers and one MusicCast SUB 100.

Tap the settings
icon.

Tap “MusicCast
Surround/Stereo”.

For detailed setup instructions, refer to the following.
https://download.yamaha.com/files/tcm:39-1212383

Adjust the speaker settings automatically (YPAO).

Y
• For details on YPAO, refer to the manual for this unit.
• Multi measurement and angle/height measurement cannot be used.

4
En

166

Check the settings, and then enjoy content playback.

Frequently asked questions
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...

I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...

If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “YPAO” to optimize the

By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as

speaker settings again (p.55). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use

input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are

“Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.131).

watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.155) in the “Setup” menu to turn off
the short messages.

Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...

I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...

If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the

You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing

volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We

“Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.157).

recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the
unit in advance (p.140). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.151).

The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...

I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...

When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha

By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied.

remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.159).

product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different

If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be

I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode...

applied when the receiver is turned on (p.140). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 or
Zone3 (p.151).

If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio

We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…

played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this
function, set “HDMI Standby Through” (p.146) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Auto”. You can
also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled.

You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the
“Option” menu (p.122).

I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.184). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, enable
HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required
every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on
how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction
manuals for each device.

167

Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.

First, check the following:

1
2
3

The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely.
The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.

Power, system and remote control
Problem

Cause

Remedy

The power does not turn on.

The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest
When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks
Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
if you try to turn on the power.

The power does not turn off.

The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock Hold down on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit.
(such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it
supply voltage.
again.)

The power turns off (standby mode) immediately.

The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers
(p.29).

The sleep timer worked.

Turn on the unit and start playback again.

The auto-standby function activated because the unit was not used for
the specified time.

To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to
“Off” (p.157).

The speaker impedance setting is incorrect.

Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.159).

The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers
(p.29).

The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of the
unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off”
(p.157).

The unit enters standby mode automatically.

The unit is not reacting.

The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and
(such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall
supply voltage.
outlet and plug it again.)

168

Problem

The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.

Cause

Remedy

The unit is out of the operating range.

Use the remote control within the operating range (p.6).

The batteries are weak.

Replace with new batteries.

The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong
lighting.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.159).

The remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.

Set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.159).

The device which is connected to the unit via HDMI does not support the
Use a device which supports the operation of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys.
operation of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys.
The RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote
control do not operate

The settings of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the unit's remote
Set “Color Key” (p.155) in the “Setup” menu to “Default”.
control have been changed.
HDMI control setting is “Off”.

Set “HDMI Control” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

169

Audio
Problem

No sound.

Cause

Remedy

Another input source is selected.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format
of the input signal, use “Information” in the “Sound” menu (p.136).

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The maximum volume is set.

Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.140).

A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on.

Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.

The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel.

To check it, use “Information” in the “Sound” menu (p.136).

The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.

To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.135).

Audio output of the speaker is disabled.

Perform “YPAO” (p.55) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker
settings (p.132).

The volume of the speaker is set too low.

Perform “YPAO” (p.55) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume
(p.134).

The volume cannot be increased.

No sound is coming from a specific speaker.

No sound is coming from the subwoofer.

The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.

The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals.

To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu
(p.135).

Subwoofer output is disabled.

Perform “YPAO” (p.55) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup” menu to
“Use” (p.134).

The volume of the subwoofer is too low.

Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.

The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function.

Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
No sound from the playback device (connected to the Protection).
unit with HDMI).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the
limit.
No sound from the playback device (when HDMI
Control is used).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the playback device audio is output
from the speakers connected to the unit.

TV audio is selected as the input source.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

170

Problem

No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used).

Cause

Remedy

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.

A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an
HDMI cable.

Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.42).

(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
(If you are trying to use ARC)

Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.145).

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.145). Also, enable ARC on the TV.

ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
No sound is coming from the Zone assigned with
“HDMI ZONE OUT Assign”.

The audio output from the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack is disabled.

Set “HDMI Audio Output - HDMI ZONE OUT” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.145).

Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio.

The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only.

To check it, use “Information” in the “Sound” menu (p.136). If necessary, change the
digital audio output setting on the playback device.

The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device.

Move the unit further away from the device.

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The volume of the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off”
(p.157).

A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on.

Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.

Noise/hum is heard.

The sound is distorted.

The sound is interrupted.

HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
to internal circuitry switching.
(p.112).

171

Video
Problem

Cause

Remedy

Another input source is selected on the unit.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Another input source is selected on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.

Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.160).

No video.

No video from the playback device (connected to the
unit with HDMI).

The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video/HDMI”
in the “Setup” menu (p.143). For information about video signals supported by the unit,
see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.186).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2/2.3-compatible devices, both the
TV and playback device must support HDCP 2.2/2.3.

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.

The video is interrupted.

Another input source is selected on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)

Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are using
(p.74).

Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.

HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
to internal circuitry switching.
(p.112).

172

FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available for the Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)
Problem

Cause

Remedy

There is multi-path interference.

Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Monaural” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.124).

FM radio reception is weak or noisy.

Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.

The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM
other electrical equipment.
antenna.
Select the station manually (p.84).
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.

Select the station manually (p.84).

The AM radio signal is weak.

Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the
supplied AM antenna.

DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only)
Problem
No DAB radio reception.

Cause

Remedy

An initial scan has not been performed.

Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.87).

Reception strength of DAB radio is poor.

Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.90), and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

There is no DAB coverage in your area.

Check with your dealer or WorldDAB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a listing of
the DAB coverage in your area.

There is multi-path interference.

Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.90), and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter.

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.

No DAB radio reception even after performing an
initial scan.

DAB radio reception is weak or noisy.

DAB information is not available or is inaccurate.

The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service or may
Contact the DAB broadcaster.
not provide information.

No DAB radio sound.

The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service.

173

Try the station later or select another station.

Bluetooth
Problem

Cause

Remedy

The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled.

A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.

No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted
during playback.

Enable the Bluetooth function (p.149).

Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit.

Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection (p.96).

The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.

Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.

There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit away from those devices.

The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP.

Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP.

The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not
working for some reason.

Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a
connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.96).

The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low.

Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device.

The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit.

Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit.

The Bluetooth connection has been terminated.

Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again
(p.96).

The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.

Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.

There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit away from those devices.

174

USB and network
Problem

Cause

Remedy

The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely.

Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.

The unit does not detect the USB device.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32.

Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed.

The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption.

Use a USB device without an encryption function.

The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
playback folder.

The network feature does not function.

The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to
“On” on the unit (p.147). If you want to configure the network parameters manually,
check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your
network (p.147).

The wireless router (access point) is turned off.

Turn on the wireless router.

The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart.
router (access point).
There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access
point).
Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might
disturb the wireless communication.

Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no
obstacles between them.
Turn off these devices.

Wireless network is not found.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless
Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
router (access point).
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are
shared (p.101).

The media sharing setting is not correct.
The unit does not detect the PC.

Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
unit to your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
the PC to the same network.

The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back.

The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.

Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information
about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media
servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.101).

The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
playback folder.

The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been
stopped. Try the station later or select another station.

The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the
station later or select another station.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played
only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number
varies depending on the radio station.

The Internet radio cannot be played.

175

Problem

Cause

Remedy

The iPod does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay.

The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.

Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the router.
Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.

The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
smartphone/tablet to the same network.

The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.

Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.

The MusicCast compatible device is not connected to the MusicCast
network.

Connect the device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.

No sound from the MusicCast compatible device.

The MusicCast connection cannot be made on
“MusicCast CONTROLLER”.

“MusicCast CONTROLLER” does not detect a
MusicCast compatible device.

The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not
connected to the wireless network at your home.

Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and start “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.

The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.

Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.

The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not
connected to the wireless network at your home.

Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and set the MusicCast compatible
device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.

Disable the cellular data transmission.

Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.
Enable the network standby function on the MusicCast compatible device.

Firmware update via the network is failed.

It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network.

176

Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.162).

Error indications on the front display
Message
Access denied

Cause

Remedy

Access to the PC is denied.

Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.101).

The unit cannot access the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.

Access error
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.

Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.51).
Check SP Wires

The speaker cables short circuit.

Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.

Internal Error

An internal error has occurred.

Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

No content

There are no playable files in the selected folder.

Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.

No device

The unit cannot detect the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Please wait

The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.

Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on
again.

RemID Mismatch

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.159).

Remote Off

The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the remote
control sensor on the main unit is turned off.

Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP”
menu to “ON” (p.159).

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for some
reasons.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason.

Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats
supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.101). If the unit supports
the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic.

Firmware update is failed.

Update the firmware again.

USB Overloaded

An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Version error

Firmware update is failed.

Update the firmware again.

Unable to play

Update failed.

177

Glossary
This section explains the technical terms used in this manual.

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio
CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448 MHz). The highest

Audio information (audio decoding format)

frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better
audio quality than that used for CDs.

Dolby Atmos

DTS 96/24

Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home

DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format

Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as

remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This

independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3

technology is used for music DVDs, etc.

dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of

DTS Dialog Control

sound above the listener.

DTS Dialog Control allows you to boost the dialog. This can be useful in noisy environments to help make the dialog

Dolby Atmos Stream

more intelligible. People with impaired hearing may also benefit. Note that the content creator may disable the use

Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby

of this feature in the mix, so that DTS Dialog Control may not always be available. Note that updates to your AVR may

TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata

add more functionality to DTS Dialog Control or increase the range of the feature.

that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV

DTS Digital Surround

receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration.

DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio.

Dolby Digital

This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel

DTS-ES

audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds

Dolby Digital Plus

a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is

Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is

7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that

recorded.

support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS Express

Dolby Enabled Speaker

DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression

A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology employ the

rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming

ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. Dolby enabled

services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that can be built into a conventional

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall speaker system footprint while providing

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby surround playback.

7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing

Dolby Surround

multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray

Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for

discs).

playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as

DTS-HD Master Audio

well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater

technology.

experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of

Dolby TrueHD

96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition

BD (Blu-ray discs).

home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96
kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD
(Blu-ray discs).

178

DTS Neo:6

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for

One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic

music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix

technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing

channels of surround sound.

data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

DTS:X
DTS:X is the next generation object-based, multi-dimensional audio technology from DTS. Unbound from channels,
DTS:X conveys the fluid movement of sound to create an incredibly rich, realistic and immersive soundscape - in
front of, behind, beside and above the audience - more accurately than ever before. DTS:X offers the ability to
automatically adapt the audio to the speaker layout that best fits the space, from a television’s built-in speakers to
a home surround theater system to a dozen or more speakers in a commercial cinema. Immerse yourself at
www.dts.com/dtsx

FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in
compression rate but provides higher audio quality.

MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression
method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10
maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on
Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3.

Neural:X
Neural:X is the latest downmixing/upmixing and spatial remapping technology from DTS. It is built in to DTS:X to
provide upmix of Neural:X-encoded and non-encoded (PCM) data. In DTS:X for AVRs and Sound Bars, Neural:X can
produce up to 11.x channels.

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is
the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on
a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).

Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is
digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the
sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric
value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate.

WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting
audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression
methods.

179

Audio Information (Others)

HDMI and video information

Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)

Component video signal

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and

unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and

Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals

woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.

is independent.

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel

Composite video signal

This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is

With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and

added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel

transmitted with a single cable.

is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.

Deep Color

Lip sync

Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors

Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase

within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using

in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video

8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to

output.

increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal
transitions and subtle gradations between colors.

HDCP
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of digital
contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).

HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal
transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any
loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video
interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.

x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and
allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of
sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images.

180

Network information

Yamaha technologies

SSID

CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)

SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.

Since the surround sound systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced

Wi-Fi

in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall
material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you

Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet

hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the

wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with

audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home.

network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can
carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.

CINEMA DSP HD3

WPS

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP HD3
feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a

intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.

wireless home network.

Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such
as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system.

SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones
have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed
on headphones.

SURROUND:AI
The AI incorporated in the DSP analyzes scenes by focusing on sound elements such as “dialogue”, “background
music”, “ambient sounds” and “sound effects” as well as instantaneously creates the optimal surround effect in real
time. An expressive power beyond conventional single sound field effects maximizes the realistic feel.

Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left
and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.

Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front
surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without presence
speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room.

Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back
speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed
of CINEMA DSP.

181

Supported devices and file formats

File formats
For information about specifications of each file, refer to the instruction manual of your

This section explains the devices and file formats supported by the unit.

recording device or consult file’s help.

Supported devices

■ USB/PC (NAS)

For information about specifications of each device, refer to the instruction manual of it.

Sampling frequency
(kHz)

Quantization
bitrate (bit)

Bitrate

The number
of channels

Gapless
playback

WAV *

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192/352.8/384

16/24/32

MP3

32/44.1/48

8 to 320

WMA

32/44.1/48

8 to 320

MPEG-4 AAC

32/44.1/48

8 to 320

FLAC

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192/352.8/384

16/24

ALAC

32/44.1/48/88.2/96

16/24

AIFF

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192/352.8/384

16/24/32

DSD

2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz/
11.2 MHz

File

■ Bluetooth device
• The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP.
• A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be compatible,
depending on the model.

■ USB devices
• This unit is compatible with USB memory devices that are in FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Do not connect any other type of USB devices.
• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB
storage device.

■ AirPlay

* Linear PCM format only. 32 bit-float files cannot be played back.

This AV Receiver is compatible with AirPlay 2. iOS 11.4 or later is required.

• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC
files on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
• When the sampling frequency is 352.8 kHz, playback is downsampled to 176.4 kHz; when the sampling
frequency is 384 kHz, playback is downsampled to 192 kHz.
• When Pure Direct is enabled, playback at 352.8 and 384 kHz is not downsampled. In addition, when Pure Direct
is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and USB cannot be delivered.

182

Video signal flow

Video conversion table

Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output

to a TV as shown below.

• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.143) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.

Video device

The unit

HDMI out
480i/576i

480p/576p

720p

1080i

1080p

m (*)

720p

m (*)

1080i

m (*)

1080p/50, 60 Hz

m (*)

Resolution
480i/576i
480p/576p

HDMI in

HDMI out

HDMI

HDMI in

1080p/24 Hz

4K
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
COMPONENT
VIDEO

m (*)

720p

m (*)

1080i

m (*)

480i/576i

COMPONENT
VIDEO

480p/576p
COMPONENT VIDEO in

VIDEO in
VIDEO

VIDEO

480i/576i

VIDEO in

m (*)

m: Available
* If “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” is set to “Zone2”, conversion to 4K is possible only from 1080p. All other resolutions are pass-through.

183

Multi-zone output

Information on HDMI

Audio signals that can be output to Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4 vary depending on how you

This section explains the functions related to HDMI and its signal compatibility.

connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks.
Using the unit’s internal
amplifier (p.39)
EXTRA SP 1-2 jacks

ZONE OUT jacks

In \ Out
Zone2

Zone3

HDMI Control

Using an external amplifier (p.111)

Zone2

Zone3

m (*3)

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that

HDMI OUT 3
(ZONE OUT) jack

supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power

Zone2 (*1)

Zone4 (*2)

and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control external devices (such as

m (*4)

m (*5, 8)

HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable.

Digital audio (HDMI)

m (*3)

Digital audio
(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)

m (*6)

Analog audio (AUDIO)

USB (*7)

Network sources (*7)

TUNER

Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)

m: Available

(Example)

*1 Available when “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
(HDMI Audio Output - HDMI ZONE OUT: On)

HDMI Control

*2 Available when “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4”
*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels]
Playback device
also turns off

when the input source selected in the main zone is selected)

The unit turns off
(standby)

Available when “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”

Turn off the TV

*4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels]
when the input source selected in the main zone is selected)

Operations available from the unit’s remote control

*5 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source

• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection

selected in the main zone is selected)

• Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed)

*6 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input

• Controlling the external device from which video is displayed on the TV (playback and menu

*7 To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input, or use the

operations)

party mode (p.115).

• Controlling the TV when you select TV audio input that is set in “TV Audio Input” in the

*8 If the Main Zone and Zone4 share the same input, the audio format that can be received in

“Setup” menu

the Main Zone is restricted by the device connected to Zone4.

• Controlling the TV with the color (RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE) keys of the remote control
when “TV Control” is set for the color keys

184

(Example)
HDMI Control

Use the cursor keys to select “Video/HDMI”.

Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

Press SETUP.

HDMI Control

Playback starts

Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
Press SCENE 1

Y
HDMI Control might not work properly. For related functions and settings, refer to the following.
– For linking with the selected scene, see “Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE)” (p.75).
– For setting the jack for TV audio input, see “TV Audio Input” (p.145).
– For setting the functions of the color keys, see “Color Key” (p.155).

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

Control-compatible BD/DVD players).

This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

1
2

Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback
devices.

Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

5
6

Configure the settings of the unit.

1
2

Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI

Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select

Press SETUP.

the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER

185

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV

“AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO

or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.75), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE 7. (The settings must

be changed only when SCENE 7 is used as the default (TV Viewing).)

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in Step 4.
It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the

HDMI signal compatibility

limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be

the TV.

output, depending on the type of the DVD player.

• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more
effectively.

• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to
the instruction manual for each device.

• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.

• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so

Audio Return Channel (ARC)

that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream

ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal

device.

signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback

to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.

1
2

Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to
“AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
• “ARC” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
• The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked
“ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for the TV.

Y
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an
audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.44).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

186

Trademarks

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos,
Dolby Surround, Dolby Vision, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.

The terms HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.

Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and other countries.

Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
This AV Receiver is compatible with AirPlay 2. iOS 11.4 or later is required.

Apple, AirPlay, Apple TV, Apple Watch, iPad, iPad Air, iPad Pro, iPhone,
Lightning, and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.

App StoreSM
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha Corporation is
under license.

(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)

Copyright © June 2015, Google
(https://www.google.com/get/noto/#sans-lgc), with Reserved Font Name
Noto Sans Version 1.004.
Copyright © June 2015, Google
(https://www.google.com/get/noto/help/cjk/), with Reserved Font Name
Noto Sans CJK Version 1.004.
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version1.1.

Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.

Android™ Google Play™

Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been
designed to work specifically with the technology identified in the badge
and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance
standards.

Google Noto Fonts
This product uses the following fonts.

x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license
from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the Symbol,
DTS:X, and the DTS:X logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS,
Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association.

This license is available with a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/OFL

Explanations regarding GPL
This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
redistribute this open-source code only. For information on
GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the
GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(https://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).

Licenses
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are certification
marks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED, Wi-Fi Protected Setup and WPA2 are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

MusicCast is a trademark or registered trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

Yamaha Eco-Label is a mark that certifies products of high environmental
performance.

The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning.
En

187

For information on the licenses of the third-party software in this
product, refer to the following.
http://(IP address of this product*)/licenses.html
* IP address of this product is checked with MusicCast
CONTROLLER.

Specifications
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

Input jacks

[RX-A3080]

• Analog Audio

– Pre Out (Unbalance) x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R *3, R.PRESENCE L/R *4)

[RX-A3080]
Audio (Unbalance) x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, AUX)
Audio (Balance) x 1 (AUDIO 4) (1:GND, 2:HOT, 3:COLD)
[RX-A2080]
Audio (Unbalance) x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, AUX)
• Digital Audio
Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2)
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1-2, AUDIO 3)
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 192 kHz)
• Video
Composite x 4 (AV 1-4)

– VGA
– 480i/60 Hz

*3 Note: barter to ZONE2

– 576i/50 Hz

*4 Note: barter to ZONE3

– 480p/60 Hz

– Pre Out (Balance) x 2 (FRONT) (1:GND, 2:HOT, 3:COLD)

– 576p/50 Hz

– ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3)

– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

[RX-A2080]

– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

– Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND
BACK L/R)

– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

– ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3)
• HDMI Output

– 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Supported Audio Formats
– Dolby Atmos

HDMI OUT x 3 (HDMI OUT 1-3 *5)
*5 HDMI OUT 3 is a jack dedicated to zone out.

– DTS:X
– Dolby TrueHD

Other jacks

– Dolby Digital Plus

• YPAO MIC x 1

– Dolby Digital

• REMOTE IN x 1

– DTS-HD Master Audio

• REMOTE OUT x 1

– DTS-HD High Resolution

USB x 1 (USB2.0)

• TRIGGER OUT x 2

– DTS Express

NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)

• RS-232C x 1

– DTS

Component x 2 (AV 1-2)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 7 (AV 1-7)
• Others

Output jacks

HDMI

• Analog Audio

• HDMI Features

– Speaker Out x 11 (9 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP 1 L/R *1, EXTRA SP 2 L/R *2)

– DSD 2.8 MHz 2-ch to 6-ch
– PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24 bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

– 4K UltraHD Video (include 4K/60, 50Hz 10/12bit)
– 3D Video

(HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2/2.3 compatible)

TUNER

*1 Note: Assignment is possible
[F.PRESENCE, ZONE2, ZONE3, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]

– ARC (Audio Return Channel)

*2 Note: Assignment is possible
[R.PRESENCE, ZONE2, ZONE3, F.PRESENCE]

– Auto Lip Sync

[Australia model]

– 21:9 Aspect Ratio

DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER)

– Deep Color

[U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models]

– x.v.Color

DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)

– BT.2020 Colorimetry

[Other models]

– HDR (High Dynamic Range)

FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

– Subwoofer Out x 2
(SUBWOOFER 1-2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monaural x 2)
– Headphone x 1

• Analog Tuner

– HDMI Control (CEC)

– HD audio playback

USB

– Selectable HDMI input in HDMI standby mode
– HDMI Zone Output

• Capable of Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A

188

Bluetooth

Compatible Decoding Formats

• Sink Function

• Decoding Format

Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R......................................................................150 W+150 W

– Dolby Atmos

• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device

– Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

• Bluetooth Version.................................................................... Ver. 4.2

– Dolby Digital

• Supported Profile

– DTS:X

Sink Function .................................................................A2DP, AVRCP
• Supported Codec

[RX-A2080]

Center ......................................................................................150 W
Surround L/R ...............................................................150 W+150 W
Surround Back L/R ......................................................150 W+150 W

– DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express

Front Presence L/R......................................................150 W+150 W
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)

– DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

Front L/R......................................................................140 W+140 W

• Wireless Output ...................................................... Bluetooth Class 2

– DTS Digital Surround

Center ......................................................................................140 W

• Maximum Communication Distance ................................10 m (33 ft)

• Post Decoding Format

Surround L/R ...............................................................140 W+140 W

Sink Function ....................................................................... SBC, AAC

MusicCast
• Controlled by MusicCast Application (iOS, Android)
• MusicCast Link Client ..........................................Main, Zone2, Zone3
• MusicCast Link Master (Input Source) .................................................
NET/USB/Bluetooth, Analog External Input, Digital External Input,
Zone2

– Dolby Surround

Surround Back L/R ......................................................140 W+140 W

– Neural:X

Front Presence L/R......................................................140 W+140 W

– DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R......................................................................155 W+155 W

Audio Section

Center ......................................................................................155 W

• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
[RX-A3080]

Surround Back L/R ......................................................155 W+155 W

• Network Connectivity ....................................Extend Mode, Connect

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 Ω)

Network

Front L/R ..................................................................... 165 W+165 W

• PC Client Function
• AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
• Wi-Fi function
– Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method
– Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection and
USB connection

Center...................................................................................... 165 W
Surround L/R............................................................... 165 W+165 W
Surround Back L/R...................................................... 165 W+165 W
Front Presence L/R ..................................................... 165 W+165 W
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ..................................................................... 150 W+150 W
Center...................................................................................... 150 W

– Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device

Surround L/R............................................................... 150 W+150 W

– Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode

Surround Back L/R...................................................... 150 W+150 W

– Radio Frequency Band: 2.4/5 GHz

Front Presence L/R ..................................................... 150 W+150 W

– Wireless LAN Standards: IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac*

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)

* 20 MHz channel bandwidth only

Surround L/R ...............................................................155 W+155 W

Front Presence L/R......................................................155 W+155 W
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
[RX-A3080]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R............................................................................ 200 W/ch
Center ................................................................................ 200 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 200 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 200 W/ch
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 200 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R............................................................................ 185 W/ch
Center ................................................................................ 185 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 185 W/ch

Front L/R ..................................................................... 165 W+165 W
Center...................................................................................... 165 W
Surround L/R............................................................... 165 W+165 W
Surround Back L/R...................................................... 165 W+165 W
Front Presence L/R ..................................................... 165 W+165 W

189

Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 185 W/ch
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 185 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)
Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Russia models].................... 230 W/ch

[RX-A2080]

Surround L/R......................................................................220 W/ch

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)

Surround Back L/R.............................................................220 W/ch

(Pure Direct, Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out)

Front L/R ............................................................................ 190 W/ch

Front Presence L/R ............................................................220 W/ch

PHONO.......................................................................... 95 dB or more

Center ................................................................................ 190 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 190 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 190 W/ch
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 190 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ............................................................................ 175 W/ch
Center ................................................................................ 175 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 175 W/ch

AUDIO 2 etc................................................................. 110 dB or more

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

[RX-A3080]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) ........................................ 175/220/295/410 W

Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) ........................................ 165/210/285/405 W

Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8 Ω ........................................................ 150 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω) ............................................ 3.5 mV/47 kΩ

Front Presence L/R............................................................ 175 W/ch

AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω) ................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ

Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Russia models].................... 220 W/ch
• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)
[RX-A3080]
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .........................................................45 mV
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ................................................... 2.4 V
• Rated Output Level / Output Impedance

Center ................................................................................ 230 W/ch

Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz).......................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω

Front Presence L/R............................................................ 230 W/ch

ZONE OUT ......................................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω

PRE OUT/ZONE OUT ................................................................... 2.0 V
• Headphone Impedance..................................................16 Ω or more

Front L/R ............................................................................ 230 W/ch

• Frequency Response

Surround L/R ..................................................................... 230 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 230 W/ch
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 230 W/ch
[RX-A2080]

AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)............................................. +0/-3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz).......................................................0±0.5 dB

[RX-A3080]

Bass Turnover ........................................................................350 Hz

Treble Turnover ....................................................................3.5 kHz
Zone2/Zone3
Bass Boost/Cut.....................................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)

Treble Boost/Cut................................±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover ....................................................................3.5 kHz

(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
..............................................................................................12 dB/oct.

Video Section

Front L/R ............................................................................ 220 W/ch

AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 75 W/ 8 Ω)
..................................................................................... 0.04% or less
[RX-A2080]

Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 220 W/ch

PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) .................................... 0.04% or less

Front Presence L/R............................................................ 220 W/ch

AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 70 W/ 8 Ω)
..................................................................................... 0.04% or less

(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)

Bass Boost/Cut.....................................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)

L.P.F. (Subwoofer)...............................................................24 dB/oct.

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) .................................... 0.04% or less

Surround L/R ..................................................................... 220 W/ch

Main Zone

• Filter Characteristics

(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)

Center ................................................................................ 220 W/ch

Zone2/Zone3 ........................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)

Bass Turnover ........................................................................350 Hz

• Maximum Output Level

(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)

Center ................................................................................ 230 W/ch

Main Zone .............................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)

Treble Boost/Cut................................±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)

PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER (50 Hz)...................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω

Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 230 W/ch

AUDIO 2 etc........................................................ 75 dB/60 dB or more
• Volume Control

• Tone Control Characteristics

• Maximum Input Signal

Front L/R ............................................................................ 230 W/ch

Surround L/R ..................................................................... 230 W/ch

(Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO............................................................... 75 dB/60 dB or more

• Damping Factor

Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 175 W/ch

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)

Speaker Out................................................................... 150 μV or less
• Channel Separation

[RX-A2080]

• Video Signal Type...................................................NTSC/PAL/SECAM
• Video Signal Level
Composite ........................................................................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y ..................................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Pb/Pr........................................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Video Maximum Input Level .................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more

Front L/R ............................................................................ 220 W/ch
Center ................................................................................ 220 W/ch
En

190

FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Brazil, Asia, Taiwan, Central and South America and General models]
.........................................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[U.K., Europe and Russia models] ............. 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
[Other models]............................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Monaural.......................................................................3 μV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Monaural/Stereo ............................................................. 69 dB/68 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Monaural/Stereo ............................................................... 0.5%/0.6%
• Antenna Input.......................................................... 75 Ω unbalanced

AM section (except Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models)
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Brazil, Asia, Taiwan, Central and South America and General models]
...................................................................530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models].................................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz

DAB section (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models)
• Tuning Range...................................... 174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III)

• Power Consumption.................................................................. 490 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off
..................................................................................................... 0.1 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby Off .................................................................. 1.4 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,
Bluetooth Standby Off
Wired ........................................................................................ 1.4 W
Wireless (Wi-Fi) ........................................................................ 1.7 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off,
Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On .............. 1.5 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On, Network Standby On
(Wi-Fi), Bluetooth Standby On ................................................... 2.5 W
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Brazil, Asia, Taiwan, Central and South America and General models]
..........................................................................................................1210 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
.................................435 x 192 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-5/8”)
* Including legs and protrusions
• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna upright)
...............................435 x 269 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 10-5/8” x 18-5/8”)
* Including legs and protrusion
• Weight
[RX-A3080]
[China, Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models]
............................................................................... 19.6 kg (43.2 lbs)

• Support Audio Format .............. MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG-4 HE-AAC v2

[Other models]...................................................... 18.1 kg (39.9 lbs)

• Antenna.................................................................... 75 Ω unbalanced

[RX-A2080] ................................................................ 17.0 kg (37.5 lbs)

General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ...................................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz

* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the
publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha
website then download the manual file.

[Brazil and Central and South America models]
.................................................. AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[Taiwan model]............................................AC110 to 120 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] ............................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] ............................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ........................................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K., Europe and Russia models] ............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] ................................................ AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
En

191

Yamaha Global Site
https://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Downloads
https://download.yamaha.com/

AV17-0221

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Copy, Annotate, Fill forms, Extract, Print high-res
Author                          : Manual Development Group, Yamaha Corporation
Create Date                     : 2019:03:12 13:55:27+09:00
Modify Date                     : 2019:06:12 06:12:07+09:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.6-c016 91.163616, 2018/10/29-16:58:49
Metadata Date                   : 2019:06:12 06:12:07+09:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : RX-A3080/RX-A2080 Owner's Manual
Description                     : 
Creator                         : Manual Development Group, Yamaha Corporation
Subject                         : 
Document ID                     : uuid:ea4ac360-b193-4569-99de-5ece6542c230
Instance ID                     : uuid:ba43db01-82ce-4db8-971e-85aed89e046b
Keywords                        : 
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 192

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Yamaha RX A3080/RX A2080 Owner's Manual Owner’s Web AV17 0221 A3080 2080 Om UCRABGLF En D0

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation